《双论》的复注巴利
Yamakapakaraṇa-anuṭīkā
《论开端解说》巴利
Ganthārambhavaṇṇanā
“简略地”就是指以总说的方式。这就是所说的“安立论母”。在诸法中,是指蕴等诸法以及善等诸法。对于以不颠倒的方式把握的诸法,依根本双论等方式展开的开示,能给所化众生带来种种善巧,也能成就遍知的作用,而不是颠倒的,所以说“颠倒执取……已经开始”。以此说明在《论事》开示之后紧接着开示《双论》的理由。其中,“颠倒执取”是指执取补特伽罗等错误执著。“依法、补特伽罗、处所等为所依”是指:依“凡任何善法,那一切皆以善为根”等而说于法,依“若某补特伽罗的色蕴生起,则彼的受蕴生起”等而说于补特伽罗,依“于此处色蕴生起,于此处受蕴生起”等而说于处所。以“等”字,当知摄取补特伽罗、处所、生、灭、彼二者遍知等。“决断与疑惑”:依圣典的文法、回答、示相、遮遣、驳斥等理趣,对所问之义作出决定为决断,因无此而有疑惑为疑惑。对于这些决断与疑惑。巴利
Saṅkhepenevāti uddeseneva. Yaṃ ‘‘mātikāṭhapana’’nti vuttaṃ. Dhammesūti khandhādidhammesu kusalādidhammesu ca. Aviparītato gahitesu dhammesu mūlayamakādivasena pavattiyamānā desanā veneyyānaṃ nānappakārakosallāvahā pariññākiccasādhanī ca hoti, na viparītatoti āha ‘‘viparītaggahaṇaṃ…pe… āraddha’’nti. Etena kathāvatthupakaraṇadesanānantaraṃ yamakapakaraṇadesanāya kāraṇamāha. Tattha viparītaggahaṇanti puggalapariggahaṇādimicchāgāhaṃ. Dhammapuggalokāsādinissayānanti ‘‘ye keci kusalā dhammā, sabbe te kusalamūlā’’tiādinā (yama. 1.mūlayamaka.1) dhamme, ‘‘yassa rūpakkhandho uppajjati, tassa vedanākkhandho uppajjatī’’tiādinā (yama. 1.khandhayamaka.50) puggalaṃ ‘‘yattha rūpakkhandho uppajjati, tattha vedanākkhandho uppajjatī’’tiādinā (yama. 1.khandhayamaka.51) okāsaṃ nissāya ārabbha pavattānaṃ. Ādi-saddena puggalokāsauppādanirodhatadubhayapariññādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sanniṭṭhānasaṃsayānanti pāḷigatipaṭivacanasarūpadassanapaṭikkhipanapaṭisedhananayehi yathāpucchitassa atthassa nicchayakaraṇaṃ sanniṭṭhānaṃ, tadabhāvato saṃsayanaṃ saṃsayo. Tesaṃ sanniṭṭhānasaṃsayānaṃ.
在这里,对于接受法的人来说,通常是先有疑惑、后才有决断,所以应该先说疑惑;但为了说明对说法的世尊而言,是先有决断、后才有疑惑,才做了这样的语序安排。因为法主已经把一切应当遍知的法像掌中的余甘子一样看得清清楚楚,安住其中,对任何地方都没有疑惑;只是为了想要解答,才随顺所化众生的心意,显示出他们心中的疑惑,以有疑惑的方式发问。这样一来,从解答和发问的角度来说,并不能成立决断与疑惑,这个道理已经说明了。但在这里,决断与疑惑应当从已经决断与疑惑的法本身来理解。因此义注中说:“在善法中,是善吗?不是善吗?因为不存在疑惑”等等。也正因为如此,才先说“决断与疑惑”,以及“依决断与疑惑”,先取决断。巴利
Kāmañcettha dhammapaṭiggāhakānaṃ saṃsayapubbakaṃ sanniṭṭhānanti paṭhamaṃ saṃsayo vattabbo, desentassa pana bhagavato sanniṭṭhānapubbako saṃsayoti dassanatthaṃ ayaṃ padānukkamo kato. Sabbañhi pariññeyyaṃ hatthāmalakaṃ viya paccakkhaṃ katvā ṭhitassa dhammasāmino na katthaci saṃsayo, vissajjetukāmatāya pana vineyyajjhāsayagataṃ saṃsayaṃ dassento saṃsayitavasena pucchaṃ karotīti evaṃ vissajjanapucchanavasena na sanniṭṭhānasaṃsayā labbhantīti ayamattho dassito, nicchitasaṃsayadhammavaseneva panettha sanniṭṭhānasaṃsayā veditabbā. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘kusalesu kusalā nu kho, na nu kho kusalāti sandehābhāvato’’tiādi. Teneva ca ‘‘sanniṭṭhānasaṃsayāna’’nti, ‘‘sanniṭṭhānasaṃsayavasenā’’ti ca paṭhamaṃ sanniṭṭhānaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ.
这里说的一百《双论》,关于《双论》应当说明的时节等内容,它的说法时节是在《论事》教说之后紧接着的时段,说法的地点就是三十三天,说法的方式则是以善根、不善根等成对的方式来讲。为了说明这个意思——也就是由“简略地”等偈颂所显示的因相,以及附带因相的注释承诺——所以说了“依时节、处所、说法”等话。因为在这里,所谓因相就是注释的标记,也就是次第的生起,以及智者能承担已到来的责任,这正是智者之所以为智者的表现。其中,“显示了已至”是连接语。巴利
Tanti yamakapakaraṇaṃ. Tassa ye samayādayo vattabbā, te kathāvatthupakaraṇadesanānantaro desanāsamayo, tāvatiṃsabhavanameva desanādeso, kusalākusalamūlādiyamakākārena desanāti vibhāgato ‘‘saṅkhepenevā’’tiādigāthāhi vibhāvitā nimittena saddhiṃ saṃvaṇṇanapaṭiññā cāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘samayadesadesanāvasenā’’tiādimāha. Nimittañhetaṃ idha saṃvaṇṇanāya, yadidaṃ kamānuppatti āgatabhāravāhitā ca paṇḍitānaṃ paṇḍitakiccabhāvato. Tattha anuppattaṃ dassetvāti sambandho.
Tattha(在那里)是指显示那个时间等。Yamanaṃ uparamananti(阎魔与死灭)说的是阎魔和死亡,所以经文说“有生就有死……范围”。其中,就像“有生就有死”那样,生是阎魔的范围;同样,“取蕴存在时就有死”,取蕴就是阎魔的范围,应该这样连接。因为它们确实具有死亡的性质。阎魔的狱卒只对已经面临死亡的造恶之人施加种种刑罚,而不是对尚未面临死亡的人,所以说死是阎魔的范围。“令教命转起之处”——这是对“范围”一词含义的解释。“或处所”则是就欲界等三界而说的。因为主宰三界的就是死王。五无间业以及依止其他外道师,或者与他们共同构成的五种怨仇、六种不能处。“回转”就是右绕。“他们之身毛”就是毛发。巴利
Tatthāti tasmiṃ samayādidassane. Yamanaṃ uparamananti yamo maraṇanti āha ‘‘jātiyā sati maraṇaṃ hotīti…pe… visayo’’ti. Tattha yathā ‘‘jātiyā sati maraṇaṃ hotī’’ti jāti yamassa visayo, evaṃ ‘‘upādānakkhandhesu santesu maraṇaṃ hotī’’ti upādānakkhandhā yamassa visayoti yojetabbaṃ. Te hi maraṇadhamminoti. Anuppattamaraṇaṃyeva kibbisakārinaṃ puggalaṃ yamapurisā vividhā kammakāraṇā karonti, na appattamaraṇanti maraṇaṃ yamassa visayo vutto. Āṇāpavattiṭṭhānanti idaṃ visaya-saddassa atthavacanaṃ. Desaṃ vāti kāmādidhātuttayadesaṃ sandhāyāha. Dhātuttayissaro hi maccurājā. Pañcānantariyāni aññasatthāruddeso ca, tena vā saddhiṃ pañca verāni cha abhabbaṭṭhānāni. Āvattāti padakkhiṇāvattā. Tanuruhāti lomā.
总说分段的解释巴利
Uddesavāravaṇṇanā
1 “双之集合”指的是以《根本双论》等为首的双论集合。因为《根本双论》等,虽然从各别论书的角度看是组成部分,但从常恒的组成部分来看,就被称为“双之集合”。因此说:“彼之集合及整部论书”。巴利
1.Yamakasamūhassāti mūlayamakādikassa yamakasamūhassa. Mūlayamakādayo hi pakaraṇāpekkhāya avayavabhūtāpi niccāvayavāpekkhāya yamakasamūhoti vutto. Tenāha ‘‘taṃsamūhassa ca sakalassa pakaraṇassā’’ti.
“善与不善根的差别”是指:在第二问中所说的、被疑惑句所含摄的、被称为“善”的那些事物的差别,同样也是第一问中所说的、被称为“善根”的那些事物的差别。这样连接是因为说了“义双”的性质。正如第一问中以“具有差别者”的身份所说的善法,在第二问中就以“差别”的身份来说;同样地,第一问中以“差别”的身份所说的善根法,在第二问中就以“具有差别者”的身份来说。因为按照说者和想说的意图,诸法有“差别”和“具有差别者”的区分。意思是:善根与善的差别——被疑惑句所含摄的那些——就是善与善根中具有差别者。在这里,第一种义理分别是以“具有差别者”观待“差别”来说的,第二种则是以“差别”观待“具有差别者”来说的,这就是它们之间的区别。因此说“因为对于想要了知者”等等。巴利
Kusalākusalamūlavisesānanti dutiyapucchāya vuttānaṃ saṃsayapadasaṅgahitānaṃ kusalasaṅkhātānaṃ, tathā paṭhamapucchāya vuttānaṃ kusalamūlasaṅkhātānaṃ visesānaṃ atthayamakabhāvassa vuttattāti yojanā. Yathā hi paṭhamapucchāya visesavantabhāvena vuttāyeva kusaladhammā dutiyapucchāyaṃ visesabhāvena vuttā, evaṃ paṭhamapucchāyaṃ visesabhāvena vuttāyeva kusalamūladhammā dutiyapucchāyaṃ visesavantabhāvena vuttā. Vattuvacanicchāvasena hi dhammānaṃ visesavisesavantatāvibhāgā hontīti. Kusalamūlakusalavisesehi saṃsayitapadasaṅgahitehi kusalakusalamūlānaṃ visesavantānanti adhippāyo. Ettha ca visesavantāpekkhavisesavasena paṭhamo atthavikappo vutto, dutiyo pana visesāpekkhavisesavantavasenāti ayametesaṃ viseso. Tenāha ‘‘ñātuṃ icchitānaṃ hī’’tiādi.
在这其中,“想要了知”是指提问的对象。“差别”是指善与善根的差别。“观待有差别者”是指观待那些被称为善根与善的、具有差别的事物。“有差别者”是指善根与善。“观待差别”是指观待善与善根的差别。“在此”是指在《根本双论》这部论书中。关于“主要性”:首先,在第一种选项中,应当知道,由于所疑是主要的,所以提问中差别是主要的。因为那些是所疑者的有差别者。但在第二种选项中,所谓差别是依于有差别者的,因此应当看到有差别者在其中是主要的。然而,两者合在一起的主要性并不成立,因为只有存在非主要,才可能有主要。因此说“每一个提问只含摄一个意义”。这应当被接受,否则,依判别与所判别的关系,此处的主要性就不成立。并非以法为能诠,即并非以真实法为能诠。因为真实法也被称为“义”,如“知深义者、见微细义者”等句中所说。而在“于因与果的智为义辨析”等处,应当知道“义”一词有因与果的能诠义。“等”字含摄了“以义现观”等处出现的利益等能诠义。因此,正因为是圣典意义的能诠。巴利
Tattha ñātuṃ icchitānanti pucchāya visayabhūtānanti attho. Visesānanti kusalakusalamūlavisesānaṃ. Visesavantāpekkhānanti kusalamūlakusalasaṅkhātehi visesavantehi sāpekkhānaṃ. Visesavatanti kusalamūlakusalānaṃ. Visesāpekkhānanti kusalakusalamūlavisesehi sāpekkhānaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ mūlayamake. Padhānabhāvoti paṭhamavikappe tāva saṃsayitappadhānattā pucchāya visesānaṃ padhānabhāvo veditabbo. Te hi saṃsayitānaṃ visesavantoti. Dutiyavikappe pana visesā nāma visesavantādhīnāti visesavantānaṃ tattha padhānabhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Dvinnaṃ pana ekajjhaṃ padhānabhāvo na yujjati. Sati hi appadhāne padhānaṃ nāma siyā. Tenāha ‘‘ekekāya pucchāya ekeko eva attho saṅgahito hotī’’ti. Evañcetaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, aññathā vinicchitavisesitabbabhāvehi idha padhānabhāvo na yujjatevāti. Na dhammavācakoti na sabhāvadhammavācako. Sabhāvadhammopi hi atthoti vuccati ‘‘gambhīrapaññaṃ nipuṇatthadassi’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 178). ‘‘Hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 720) attha-saddassa hetuphalavācakatā daṭṭhabbā. Ādi-saddenassa ‘‘atthābhisamayā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.129) āgatā hitādivācakatā saṅgayhati. Tenevāti pāḷiatthavācakattā eva.
“三个词”这里,pi这个字表示集合的意思,而集合应该是在同类结合的情况下。有人怀疑:难道“名”这个词能毫无遗漏地涵盖善等一切吗?为了消除这个疑问,所以说“三个词……是涵盖者”。其中,“只是涵盖者”里的matta这个词,是用来排除特殊情况的。为了显示被排除的那种特殊情况,所以说“并非毫无遗漏地涵盖”,因为色并不被“名”这个词所涵盖。应当理解这个限定:只有善等才是名,而不是只有名才是善等。正是针对这个限定,才说“仅仅是就善等的涵盖性而说的”。虽然“名”这个词并不能毫无遗漏地涵盖善等,但它确实是善等的涵盖者,而且正是为了这个目的才取用它,因此说名属于善三法所摄。为了显示这个意思,所以说“善等……说”。巴利
Tīṇipi padānīti ettha pi-saddo samuccayattho, samuccayo ca tulyayoge siyā. Kiṃ nāma-padena anavasesato kusalādīnaṃ saṅgahoti āsaṅkāya tadāsaṅkānivattanatthamāha ‘‘tīṇipi…pe… saṅgāhakatta’’nti. Tattha saṅgāhakattamattanti matta-saddo visesanivattiatthoti. Tena nivattitaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na niravasesasaṅgāhakatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Na hi rūpaṃ nāma-padena saṅgayhati. Kusalādiyeva nāmanti niyamo daṭṭhabbo, na nāmaṃyeva kusalādīti imameva ca niyamaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kusalādīnaṃ saṅgāhakattamattameva sandhāya vutta’’nti. Yadipi nāma-padaṃ na niravasesakusalādisaṅgāhakaṃ, kusalādisaṅgāhakaṃ pana hoti, tadatthameva ca taṃ gahitanti nāmassa kusalattikapariyāpannatā vuttāti dassento āha ‘‘kusalādi…pe… vutta’’nti.
小义注分的注释巴利
Niddesavāravaṇṇanā
52 关于第二双论,也就是一根本双论。这里也同样:就像在一根本双论中,提问是以“哪些是善”开始的,在这里,在互相根本双论中也应该以“哪些是善”来开始提问。为什么?因为前一双论……没有转起。这是就第二双论没有那样转起而说的,但第三双论确实是那样转起的。有些论师说:因为在第一、第二双论中,前问通过反转就成了后问,所以后问与前问相同,只是去掉了逆序;但在互相双论中不是这样。因为在那里,两个提问彼此不同。如果在那里两个提问也应该相同,那就应该以“哪些是善”作为第一问开始,而后问就应该说“那些法都以善根为一根本”。然而并没有那样说。不像第一、第二双论那样把前后问做成相同,在第三双论中它们不相同,因为没有以“哪些是善”开始;因此,顺问应该与逆问相符。针对这个意思,才说“不先问‘哪些是善’”。巴利
52.Dutiyayamaketi ekamūlayamake. Evamidhāpīti yathā ekamūlayamake ‘‘ye keci kusalā’’icceva pucchā āraddhā, evaṃ idhāpi aññamaññamūlayamakepi ‘‘ye keci kusalā’’icceva pucchā ārabhitabbā siyā. Kasmā? Purimayamaka…pe… appavattattāti. Idañca dutiyayamakassa tathā appavattattā vuttaṃ, tatiyayamakaṃ pana tatheva pavattaṃ. Kecīti padakārā. Te hi yathā paṭhamadutiyayamakesu purimapucchā eva parivattanavasena pacchimapucchā katāti pacchimapucchāya purimapucchā samānā ṭhapetvā paṭilomabhāvaṃ, na tathā aññamaññayamake. Tattha hi dvepi pucchā aññamaññavisadisā. Yadi tatthāpi dvīhipi pucchāhi sadisāhi bhavitabbaṃ , ‘‘ye keci kusalā’’ti paṭhamapucchā ārabhitabbā, pacchimapucchā vā ‘‘sabbe te dhammā kusalamūlena ekamūlā’’ti vattabbā siyā. Evaṃ pana avatvā paṭhamadutiyayamakesu viya purimapacchimapucchā sadisā akatvā tatiyayamake tāsaṃ visadisatā ‘‘ye keci kusalā’’ti anāraddhattā, tasmā paṭilomapucchānurūpāya anulomapucchāya bhavitabbanti imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ye keci kusalāti apucchitvā’’ti vuttanti vadanti.
“以义的方式”,就是依照那些可能存在的、已确定无疑的义。“与之相应的”,就是与那个前问在义和文上相适合。因为后问要观待前问而成立。“因此”,就是这个意思。因为在顺向中虽然已经断除了疑惑,但在逆向中仍然会生起疑惑;如果不会生起疑惑,那么逆向的问就没有作用了。所以并不是前问与后问相应,而是按照上面所说的方式,后问与前问相应。又由于这种相应性,以义等方式将两个词关联起来,所以说为“义等双论”。在这里,应当知道顺向和逆向是依照说法的次第,因为先说了“善是善根”,之后又说“善根是善”。其余的双论中也是同样的道理。或者,由于执取有差别者和差别、差别和有差别者,应当知道这里的顺向和逆向。因为在第一问中,把那些有差别者的法作为确定所依来显示,说了“哪些是善法”,然后为了显示其中作为疑惑所依的差别,问“那些都是以善为根吗”。在第二问中,则反过来,把那些有差别者所依的差别作为确定来显示,说了“又哪些是善根”,然后为了显示那些作为疑惑所依的有差别者,问“那些法都是善吗”。因为众生的意乐多种多样,所以确定和疑惑的所依并不固定。巴利
Atthavasenāti sambhavantānaṃ nicchitasaṃsayitānaṃ atthānaṃ vasena. Tadanurūpāyāti tassā purimapucchāya atthato byañjanato ca anucchavikāya. Purimañhi apekkhitvā pacchimāya bhavitabbaṃ. Tenāti tasmā. Yasmā anulome saṃsayacchede jātepi paṭilome saṃsayo uppajjati, yadi na uppajjeyya, paṭilomapucchāya payojanameva na siyā, tasmā na pacchimapucchānurūpā purimapucchā, atha kho vuttanayena purimapucchānurūpā pacchimapucchā, tāya ca anurūpatāya atthādivasena dvinnaṃ padānaṃ sambandhattā atthādiyamakatā vuttā. Desanākkamato cettha anulomapaṭilomatā veditabbā ‘‘kusalā kusalamūlā’’ti vatvā ‘‘kusalamūlā kusalā’’ti ca vuttattā. Sesayamakesupi eseva nayo. Visesavantavisesa, visesavisesavantaggahaṇato vā idha anulomapaṭilomatā veditabbā. Paṭhamapucchāyañhi ye dhammā visesavanto, te nicchayādhiṭṭhāne katvā dassento ‘‘ye keci kusalā dhammā’’ti vatvā tesu yasmiṃ viseso saṃsayādhiṭṭhāno, taṃdassanatthaṃ ‘‘sabbe te kusalamūlā’’ti pucchā katā. Dutiyapucchāyaṃ pana tappaṭilomato yena visesena te visesavanto, taṃ visesaṃ sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā dassento ‘‘ye vā pana kusalamūlā’’ti vatvā te visesavante saṃsayādhiṭṭhānabhūte dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbe te dhammā kusalā’’ti pucchā katā. Aniyatavatthukā hi sanniṭṭhānasaṃsayā anekajjhāsayattā sattānaṃ.
用这句话也是,也就是用“凡任何以善根为单根”这个句子。这样就不能说,所以为了说明他的意图,用“并非……”等话来展开这个意图。其中“正是因此”,是因为善这个词的含义和“以善根为单根”这个词的含义不同。“解答”就是分别说明。“若不然”,就是若以“以善根为单根”这个句子来提问。那些说法,就是善的说法和“以善根为单根”的说法。而且应当知道,这是依善心生起之色来说明它是无记的。在这里,就是在“用这句话,那个意思也能成立”这句话中。“凡任何善……能成立”,以此说明诸善与“以善根为单根”并无例外。因此说“并非……存在”。以“所说词句之义本身能成立”这句话,通过说明未说词句之义不能成立,就显明了他的意图。正如“以善根为单根”这个词句之义会超出善这个词句之义,善这个词句之义却不会那样超出它。怎样构成质难,又怎样构成答辩?应知:质难是“以善根为单根的就是善”,答辩则是“以善根为单根的才是善”。像第二双论中那样,没有问就说,即没有问“凡任何善”就说。以善根,就是以善为根。他们,就是以善根为单根者。巴利
Imināpi byañjanenāti ‘‘ye keci kusalamūlena ekamūlā’’ti imināpi vākyena. Evaṃ na sakkā vattunti yenādhippāyena vuttaṃ, tamevādhippāyaṃ vivarati ‘‘na hī’’tiādinā. Tattha tenevāti kusalabyañjanatthassa kusalamūlena ekamūlabyañjanatthassa bhinnattā eva. Vissajjananti vibhajanaṃ . Itarathāti kusalamūlena ekamūlabyañjanena pucchāya katāya. Tāni vacanānīti kusalavacanaṃ kusalamūlena ekamūlavacanañca. Kusalacittasamuṭṭhānarūpavasena cassa abyākatadīpanatā daṭṭhabbā. Etthāti ‘‘imināpi byañjanena tassevatthassa sambhavato’’ti etasmiṃ vacane. Ye keci kusalā…pe… sambhavatoti etena kusalānaṃ kusalamūlena ekamūlatāya byabhicārābhāvaṃ dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘na hi…pe… santī’’ti. Vuttabyañjanatthassevasambhavatoti hi iminā avuttabyañjanatthassa sambhavābhāvavacanena svāyamadhippāyamattho vibhāvito. Yathā hi kusalamūlena ekamūlabyañjanattho kusalabyañjanatthaṃ byabhicarati, na evaṃ taṃ kusalabyañjanattho. Kathaṃ katvā codanā, kathañca katvā parihāro? Kusalamūlena ekamūlā kusalā evāti codanā katā, kusalamūlena ekamūlā eva kusalāti pana parihāro pavattoti veditabbaṃ. Dutiyayamake viya apucchitvāti ‘‘ye keci kusalā’’ti apucchitvā. Kusalamūlehīti kusalehi mūlehi. Teti kusalamūlena ekamūlā.
“一起生起”这里,iti这个词有“等等”或“方式”的意思。由此显示出“善根既是单根,又互为根”等其余巴利原文。针对这一点,才有“依照前面所说的方式,就应当作解答”的说法。其中,“前面”指顺问的解答。“依照所说的方式”,就是依照“诸根一起生起”等所说的方式。“那也”,指“以善根”等注释文句。“如是”,就是以那种方式,意思是:应当像顺问中那样作解答。为了说明凭什么理由说“不能说”,才说了“或有……”等。其中,应当只用“是”来作答,因为就像在“那一切法是善”的提问中一样,在“那一切法以善根为单根”的提问中,也只能得到“是”的答复,而不像顺问中那样,因为没有需要分别显示的自性,所以不作分别解答。凡是那些以善根为单根的法,它们并不是以善根而互为根。然而,凡是那些以善根互为根的法,它们就是以善根为单根。因此说“并非……应当作分别”。巴利
Ekato uppajjantīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho pakārattho vā. Tena ‘‘kusalamūlāni ekamūlāni ceva aññamaññamūlāni cā’’tiādipāḷisesaṃ dasseti. Yaṃ sandhāya ‘‘heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva vissajjanaṃ kātabbaṃ bhaveyyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha heṭṭhāti anulomapucchāvissajjane. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘mūlāni yāni ekato uppajjantī’’tiādinā vuttanayena. Tampīti ‘‘kusalamūlenā’’tiādi aṭṭhakathāvacanampi. Tathāti tena pakārena, anulomapucchāyaṃ viya vissajjanaṃ kātabbaṃ bhaveyyāti iminā pakārenāti attho. Yena kāraṇena ‘‘na sakkā vattu’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye vā panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘āmantā’’icceva vissajjanena bhavitabbanti ‘‘sabbe te dhammā kusalā’’ti pucchāyaṃ viya ‘‘sabbe te dhammā kusalamūlena ekamūlā’’ti pucchitepi paṭivacanavissajjanameva labbhati, na anulomapucchāyaṃ viya sarūpadassanavissajjanaṃ vibhajitvā dassetabbassa abhāvato. Ye hi dhammā kusalamūlena ekamūlā, na te dhammā kusalamūlena aññamaññamūlāva. Ye pana kusalamūlena aññamaññamūlā, te kusalamūlena ekamūlāva. Tenāha ‘‘na hi…pe… vibhāgo kātabbo bhaveyyā’’ti.
在这里,“由何”是指:因为在互为根的法里,不存在单根性。“于何处”是指:在与智相应的心生起之处。意思是:因为互为根性,也因为单根性。因为当说两者各自以对方为根时,也就已经说了它们各自以对方为单根,因为“一”这个词含义相同。因此说“然而于何处……非单根”。这是错误的,因为在两者中,各自以对方为单根性也是成立的。因此说“为了遮止这种执取”等。为了阐明“凡以善根互为根的法,它们都以善根为单根”这个意思,这里用“是”这个词说明:在两种根生起的地方,各自以对方为单根性已经被表明,所以说“以‘是’这个回答就遮止了那种执取”。关于“决定”:这里,三根同时生起时,它们的互为单根性可以决定,但两根时怎么说呢?所以说“互为根者……”等。“只是同根性”,用限定来显示被遮止的意思,所以说“不是互为同根性”。由此显示:声称“互为根者只是同根性”,所以执取单根;并不是为了显示它们有不同于互为缘性的同根性。二根,就是二根同时生起者。为了显示它们的同根性,所以说“在它们中……”等。“以它们为根的其他”,就是这二根之外的其他俱生法,它们以这二根为根。巴利
Tattha yenāti yena aññamaññamūlesu ekamūlassa abhāvena. Yatthāti yasmiṃ ñāṇasampayuttacittuppāde. Aññamaññamūlakattā ekamūlakattā cāti adhippāyo. Dvinnaṃ dvinnañhi ekekena aññamaññamūlakatte vutte tesaṃ ekekena ekamūlakattampi vuttameva hoti samānattho ekasaddoti katvā. Tenevāha ‘‘yattha pana…pe… na ekamūlānī’’ti. Tayidaṃ micchā, dvīsupi ekekena itarassa ekamūlakattaṃ sambhavati evāti. Tenāha ‘‘etassa gahaṇassa nivāraṇattha’’ntiādi. ‘‘Ye dhammā kusalamūlena aññamaññamūlā, te kusalamūlena ekamūlā’’ti imamatthaṃ vibhāventena idha ‘‘āmantā’’ti padena yattha dve mūlāni uppajjanti, tattha ekekena itarassa ekamūlakattaṃ pakāsitamevāti āha ‘‘āmantāti imināva vissajjanena taṃgahaṇanivāraṇato’’ti . Nicchitattāti ettha ekato uppajjamānānaṃ tiṇṇannaṃ tāva mūlānaṃ nicchitaṃ hotu aññamaññekamūlakattaṃ, dvinnaṃ pana kathanti āha ‘‘aññamaññamūlānaṃ hī’’tiādi. Samānamūlatā evāti avadhāraṇena nivattitatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na aññamaññasamānamūlatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena aññamaññamūlānaṃ samānamūlatāmattavacanicchāya ekamūlaggahaṇaṃ, na tesaṃ aññamaññapaccayatāvisiṭṭhasamānamūlatādassanatthanti imamatthaṃ dasseti. Dvinnaṃ mūlānanti dvinnaṃ ekamūlānaṃ ekato uppajjamānānaṃ. Yathā tesaṃ samānamūlatā, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tesu hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃmūlehi aññehīti itaramūlehi mūladvayato aññehi sahajātadhammehi.
现在,为了说明在逆问中为什么只问“善”,而不问“以善根为一根”,所以说“然而在互为根性中……应知已作”。因为以善根来说,在互为根的情况下,没有任何一法不是一根,这个意思已经说过了。这里说的是:只就与根相应而言,不是说与根不相应。否则前后就会矛盾。正因为如此,也就是因为只说与根相应。在两处,即“互为根”和“一根”这两处。所说的“以善根”,意思是:以与善根相应。如果这两种说法都只是说与根相应,那为什么只在顺问中取“一根”,而在逆问中不取呢?在这两处,是应该取还是不应该取?这样一来,这互为双论的教导就和根双论、一根双论的教导成了同一个意思——考虑到这个质疑,才说了“于彼处……”等。巴利
Idāni yena adhippāyena paṭilome ‘‘kusalā’’icceva pucchā katā, na ‘‘kusalamūlena ekamūlā’’ti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aññamaññamūlatte pana…pe… katāti daṭṭhabba’’nti āha. Na hi kusalamūlena aññamaññamūlesu kiñci ekamūlaṃ na hotīti vuttovāyamattho. Mūlayuttatameva vadati, na mūlehi ayuttanti adhippāyo. Aññathā pubbenāparaṃ virujjheyya. Tenevāti mūlayuttatāya eva vuccamānattā. Ubhayatthāpīti aññamaññamūlā ekamūlāti dvīsupi padesu. ‘‘Kusalamūlenā’’ti vuttaṃ, kusalamūlena sampayuttenāti hi attho. Yadi ubhayampi vacanaṃ mūlayuttatameva vadati, atha kasmā anulomapucchāyameva ekamūlaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, na paṭilomapucchāyanti ubhayatthāpi taṃ gahetabbaṃ na vā gahetabbaṃ. Evañhi mūlekamūlayamakadesanāhi ayaṃ aññamaññayamakadesanā samānarasā siyāti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi.
“彼处彼处”是指在那个彼此双论中。虽然“一根”和“彼此为根”这两个词,按照前面所说的方式,都只是在说与根相关联这一点,但为了显示总相和别相的特征确实有差别,所以说了“于根关联的总相中……”等话。有根诸法根相同,就是一根性,因此“一根”这个说法,是就它们没有差别、仅仅说有根存在这一点而言,并不像“彼此为根”这个词那样,说明在诸根中存在的差别。而且,总相上的决定并不能消除别相上的疑惑——为了说明这个意思,说了“于根关联的总相中……转起”这段话。然而,别相上的决定,正是在消除总相上的疑惑的情况下生起的,所以说“然而于根关联的别相中……即是已决定”。因此,这是以所说的内容为理由而作的回指,意思是:由于不离别相的决定,总相已被决定,或者在那里已没有疑惑。由此说了“未作‘一根’的提问”。不成为善性之揭示者,意思是:它并不唯独揭示善性,因为它也揭示与彼不同类者。由此说了“因为于善性有疑惑存在”。“彼此为根之语”,意思是:仅仅是“彼此为根”之语,这是意图所在。由于善的章节在延续,以此说明在“这一切法都是善”的善的把握中说了原因。于一根的把握中,确实已显示无作用,而此开示是依善而作的。巴利
Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ aññamaññayamake. Yadipi ekamūlā aññamaññamūlāti idaṃ padadvayaṃ vuttanayena mūlayuttatameva vadati, tathāpi sāmaññavisesalakkhaṇe attheva bhedoti dassetuṃ ‘‘mūlayogasāmaññe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Samūlakānaṃ samānamūlatā ekamūlattanti ekamūlavacanaṃ tesu avisesato mūlasabbhāvamattaṃ vadati, na aññamaññamūlasaddo viya mūlesu labbhamānaṃ visesaṃ, na ca sāmaññe nicchayo visese saṃsayaṃ vidhamatīti imamatthamāha ‘‘mūlayogasāmaññe…pe… pavattā’’ti iminā. Visese pana nicchayo sāmaññe saṃsayaṃ vidhamanto eva pavattatīti āha ‘‘mūlayogavisese pana…pe… nicchitameva hotī’’ti. Tasmāti vuttasseva tassa hetubhāvena parāmasanaṃ, visesanicchayeneva avinābhāvato, sāmaññassa nicchitattā tattha vā saṃsayābhāvatoti attho. Tenāha ‘‘ekamūlāti pucchaṃ akatvā’’ti. Kusalabhāvadīpakaṃ na hotīti kusalabhāvasseva dīpakaṃ na hoti tadaññajātikassapi dīpanato. Tenāha ‘‘kusalabhāve saṃsayasabbhāvā’’ti. Aññamaññamūlavacananti kevalaṃ aññamaññamūlavacananti adhippāyo. Kusalādhikārassa anuvattamānattāti iminā ‘‘sabbe te dhammā kusalā’’ti kusalaggahaṇe kāraṇamāha. Ekamūlaggahaṇe hi payojanābhāvo dassito, kusalassa vasena cāyaṃ desanāti.
53-61 在根理趣中所说的“义”,就是指在根理趣中所说的善等诸法。因为善等自性之法,在这里由于是圣典所说的义,所以被称为“义”。这是为了通过善根性、对根的简别以及显示与根的关联来阐明。作为善根的根,就是善根之根,这是复合词的连接方式。因为“根”这个词,是应遮遣者和应摄取者所共通的。由于也存在不善和无记的根法,所以以善根性来简别根法。而通过把握“根”,也显示了有根之法的与根关联。以相同的根、对根的简别以及显示与根的关联来阐明,所以说“一根根之根”;以彼此为根性、对根的简别以及显示与根的关联来阐明,所以说“彼此为根根之根”——这样连接起来就说为根之根理趣。应当知道,在这三种双论中,这里所说的简别,只是另一种表述方式。巴利
53-61.Mūlanaye vutte eva attheti mūlanaye vutte eva kusalādidhamme. Kusalādayo hi sabhāvadhammā idha pāḷiatthatāya atthoti vutto. Kusalamūlabhāvena, mūlassa visesanena, mūlayogadīpanena ca pakāsetuṃ. Kusalamūlabhūtā mūlā kusalamūlamūlāti samāsayojanā. Mūlavacanañhi nivattetabbagahetabbasādhāraṇaṃ. Akusalābyākatāpi mūladhammā atthīti kusalamūlabhāvena mūladhammā visesitā. Mūlaggahaṇena ca mūlavantānaṃ mūlayogo dīpito hoti. Samānena mūlena, mūlassa visesanena, mūlayogadīpanena ca pakāsetuṃ ‘‘ekamūlamūlā’’ti, aññamaññassa mūlena mūlabhāvena, mūlassa visesanena, mūlayogadīpanena ca pakāsetuṃ ‘‘aññamaññamūlamūlā’’ti mūlamūlanayo vuttoti yojanā. Tīsupi yamakesu yathāvuttavisesanamevettha pariyāyantaraṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“阐明与根的关联”这句话的意思是:把与根的关联本身当作主要的、殊胜的内容来阐明。比如在“善是它们的根,所以是善根”这种依外在含义构成的复合词里,与根的关联是以主要成分的方式来说的;但并不是像只说“所谓善的根,就是善根”那样,也不是像加上限定语说“善根的根”那样——那是以后面词义为主的复合词,不是这里要说的。因此才说“显示……其他词义”。所谓“所说的方式”,就是在“根之根”这一理趣中,依照“以善根性来限定根”等说法所说的方式;以及在“根”这一理趣中,依照“以后分义复合词中的ka字”等说法所说的方式,正是如此。应当把“根之根”理趣中的言辞表述方式合在一起连接起来。巴利
Mūlayogaṃdīpetunti mūlayogameva padhānaṃ sātisayañca katvā dīpetunti adhippāyo. Yathā hi kusalāni mūlāni etesanti kusalamūlakānīti bāhiratthasamāse mūlayogo padhānabhāvena vutto hoti, na evaṃ ‘‘kusalasaṅkhātā mūlā kusalamūlā’’ti kevalaṃ, ‘‘kusalamūlamūlā’’ti savisesanaṃ vā vutte uttarapadatthappadhānasamāse. Tenāha ‘‘aññapadattha…pe… dīpetu’’nti. Vuttappakārovāti ‘‘kusalamūlabhāvena mūlassa visesanenā’’tiādinā mūlamūlanaye ca, ‘‘aññapadatthasamāsantena ka-kārenā’’tiādinā mūlakanaye ca vuttappakāro eva. Vacanapariyāyo mūlamūlakanaye ekajjhaṃ katvā yojetabbo.
74-85 “不能获得单一根性”这句话的意思是:对于十八种无因心生起、无因等起的色法以及涅槃来说,由于不能和无记根一起获得,所以它们不能被称为“以无记根为同一根”。就像前面所说的心生起等法,因为不具备因缘,所以得到“无因”这个称呼;但有因等起的色法则不是这样。因此说“除去无因的称呼”。在这里,虽然按照“一切色法都不是因,只是无因”这种说法,有因等起的色法也是无因的,但是根据“无记法以因缘为缘,对有记无记的因来说,以因缘为缘,对相应诸蕴和心等起色法来说,以因缘为缘”这段经文,从因缘关联的角度来说,有因等起色法没有“无因”这个称呼。不过有些人说:“‘作不记说’的意思是:用有因这个称呼来不记说。否则,‘无因的无记法,以无记根为单一根’就不能说了。”对此应当说:已经说过了。因为没有“无因”这个称呼,有因性的同义语就已经成立。再者,由于因缘确实存在,它的有因性同义语确实可以获得。因此说“或者,不像有因双论中那样……作不记说”。“在这里”就是指在这个单一根双论中。“依因缘关联与否”就是依因缘的关联或不关联,也就是因缘的有无。它确实获得有因这个称呼,因为作为缘的因确实存在。巴利
74-85.Na ekamūlabhāvaṃ labhamānehīti abyākatamūlena na ekamūlakaṃ tathāvattabbataṃ labhamānehi aṭṭhārasaahetukacittuppādāhetukasamuṭṭhānarūpanibbānehi ekato alabbhamānattā. Yathā hi yathāvuttacittuppādādayo hetupaccayavirahitā ahetukavohāraṃ labhanti, na evaṃ sahetukasamuṭṭhānaṃ rūpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ahetukavohārarahitaṃ katvā’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘sabbaṃ rūpaṃ na hetukameva, ahetukamevā’’ti vuttattā kiñcāpi sahetukasamuṭṭhānampi rūpaṃ ahetukaṃ, ‘‘abyākato dhammo abyākatassa dhammassa hetupaccayena paccayo, vipākābyākatā kiriyābyākatā hetū sampayuttakānaṃ khandhānaṃ cittasamuṭṭhānānañca rūpānaṃ hetupaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.403) pana vacanato hetupaccayayogena sahetukasamuṭṭhānassa rūpassa ahetukavohārābhāvo vutto. Keci pana ‘‘abbohārikaṃ katvāti sahetukavohārena abbohārikaṃ katvāti atthaṃ vatvā aññathā ‘ahetukaṃ abyākataṃ abyākatamūlena ekamūla’nti na sakkā vattu’’nti vadanti. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttameva ahetukavohārābhāvena sahetukatāpariyāyassa atthasiddhattā. Apica hetupaccayasabbhāvato tassa sahetukatāpariyāyo labbhateva. Tenāha ‘‘na vā sahetukaduke viya…pe… abbohārikaṃ kata’’nti. Ettha etthāti etasmiṃ ekamūlakaduke. Hetupaccayayogāyogavasenāti hetupaccayena yogāyogavasena, hetupaccayassa sabbhāvāsabbhāvavasenāti attho. Sahetukavohārameva labhati paccayabhūtahetusabbhāvato.
另外有些人说:以色由有因心等起,却是无因、无记这句话来说,虽然它被包含在内,但因为它有根,所以不能说它是以无记根为不独因;同时,即使它有根,也并不能直接说它是有因,所以也不能说它是以无记根为独因。因此,对于无因的无记是以无记根为不独因、有因的无记是以无记根为独因这两处,都没有妨碍,所以就把它当作不予记说。这只是他们自己的主张。因为在注释书里已经判定,有因无记等起之色是以无记根为独因,所以这里应当按前面所说的方式来理解其含义。巴利
Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘sahetukacittasamuṭṭhānaṃ rūpaṃ ahetukaṃ abyākatanti iminā vacanena saṅgahaṃ gacchantampi samūlakattā ‘abyākatamūlena na ekamūla’nti na sakkā vattuṃ, satipi samūlakatte nippariyāyena sahetukaṃ na hotīti ‘abyākatamūlena ekamūla’nti ca na sakkā vattuṃ, tasmā ‘ahetukaṃ abyākataṃ abyākatamūlena na ekamūlaṃ, sahetukaṃ abyākataṃ abyākatamūlena ekamūla’nti dvīsupi padesu anavarodhato abbohārikaṃ katvāti vutta’’nti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ ‘‘sahetukaabyākatasamuṭṭhānaṃ rūpaṃ abyākatamūlena ekamūlaṃ hotī’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ tassa ekamūlabhāvassa nicchitattā, tasmā vuttanayeneva cettha attho veditabbo.
86-97 从善、不善、无记的区分出发,通过被称为“名”和“非名”的这种差别来把握无色法,这就叫“名的确定”,所以说“因为已确定了诸名”。由此说明它们更为突出,因为论典并没有对它们加以限定,所以可以知道。如果是这样,那么在“无因名、有因名”这样的不同文本中,为什么还要采用“名”这个词呢?回答说“为了让它更明显”。意思是:既然已经说得很明白了,还有什么可说的呢?巴利
86-97. Kusalākusalābyākatarāsito namananāmanasaṅkhātena visesena arūpadhammānaṃ gahaṇaṃ niddhāraṇaṃ nāma hotīti āha ‘‘nāmānaṃ niddhāritattā’’ti. Tena tesaṃ adhikabhāvamāha viññāyamānameva pakaraṇena aparicchinnattā. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘ahetukaṃ nāmaṃ sahetukaṃ nāma’’nti pāṭhantare kasmā nāmaggahaṇaṃ katanti āha ‘‘supākaṭabhāvattha’’nti, paribyattaṃ katvā vutte kiṃ vattabbanti adhippāyo.
2. 蕴双论巴利
2. Khandhayamakaṃ
总说分的注释巴利
Uddesavāravaṇṇanā
2-3 在“蕴双论”等中……“以及应当说遍知”,这是以主要方式显示应当说的内容。因为阿毗达摩确实是应当证知之说,而它只是以遍知为究竟。在诸遍知中,若没有审察遍知,就没有断遍知;而审察遍知,对于圆满摄受他人者来说,并非以其他方式产生,而是通过时间、人、处的分别,以各别和共同把握诸蕴的生灭相而殊胜产生,不是别的样子。为了显示这个道理,论师举出“在六种时间分别中……以及应当说遍知”作为应当说的主要内容。在那里,正如没有审察遍知就没有断遍知,同样,没有审察遍知也就没有知遍知。而那个知遍知,是以闻所成智为根本的。善于说法的导师,为了通过合、离、总、别、句义等的分别显示,阐明诸蕴中遍知的分类,便以“五蕴”等开始说法。为了显示这一点,论师说了“然而那些蕴”等。“以五句”是指以五个总说的句子。巴利
2-3.Khandhayamake…pe… pariññā ca vattabbāti idaṃ padhānabhāvena vattabbadassanaṃ. Abhiññeyyakathā hi abhidhammo, sā ca yāvadeva pariññattāti pariññāsu ca na vinā tīraṇapariññāya pahānapariññā, tīraṇañca sampuṇṇaparānuggahassa adhippetattā kālapuggalokāsavibhāgamukhena khandhānaṃ visuṃ saha ca uppādanirodhalakkhaṇapariggahavasena sātisayaṃ sambhavati, nāññathāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘chasu kālabhedesu…pe… pariññā ca vattabbā’’ti padhānaṃ vattabbaṃ uddharati. Tattha pana yathā na tīraṇapariññāya vinā pahānapariññā, evaṃ tīraṇapariññā vinā ñātapariññāya. Sā ca sutamayañāṇamūlikāti desanākusalo satthā anvayato byatirekato ca samudāyāvayavapadatthādivibhāgadassanamukhena khandhesu pariññāppabhedaṃ pakāsetukāmo ‘‘pañcakkhandhā’’tiādinā desanaṃ ārabhīti dassento ‘‘te pana khandhā’’tiādimāha. Pañcahi padehīti pañcahi samudāyapadehi.
这里说的“其中”,是指在那些总说和别说的表述里。“法”是指以色为代表的、会变坏等等的应知之法。“总说之句”是指色蕴等总说之句。虽然从究竟真实来说,离开了各个组成部分,并没有一个叫“总聚”的东西存在,但就像部分不是总聚一样,总聚也不是部分。虽然总聚和部分是有区别的,但由于总说词和别说词两者指的是同一个事物,所以实际上并无差别。因为这两个词意义相同,可能会产生疑惑,所以论师说“在这个有疑惑的地方”。在“眼处计入色蕴之数,识蕴就是由它生起的心识界”等说法中,说的是部分的总说句义;而在“凡任何色……这称为色蕴”等说法中,说的则是全部,因此论师说“色等……义”。在这里,由于能修饰和所修饰的对象具有同一所指,所以说别说之句也具有总说句义,同样,总说之句也具有别说句义。因为能修饰和所修饰的意义,并不是被承认为绝对地不同或绝对地相同,而是既不同又相同。因此,为了显示无差别而说第一种方式,为了显示有差别而说第二种方式。那个被称为“变坏”等的“聚集”之义,是通过能修饰和所修饰的关系,以色等别说之词以及“色”等词和“蕴”字来分别解说的,当从意义上被视为聚体时,它就只是变坏等之义而已。巴利
Tatthāti tesu samudāyāvayavapadesu. Dhammoti ruppanādiko ñeyyadhammo. Samudāyapadassāti rūpakkhandhādisamudāyapadassa. Yadipi avayavavinimutto paramatthato samudāyo nāma natthi, yathā pana avayavo samudāyo na hoti, evaṃ na samudāyopi avayavoti satipi samudāyāvayavānaṃ bhede dvinnaṃ padānaṃ samānādhikaraṇabhāvato atthevābhedoti padadvayassa samānatthatāya siyā āsaṅkāti āha ‘‘etasmiṃ saṃsayaṭṭhāne’’ti. ‘‘Cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhagaṇanaṃ gacchati, viññāṇakkhandho tajjā manoviññāṇadhātū’’tiādīsu ekadeso samudāyapadattho vutto, ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ…pe… ayaṃ vuccati rūpakkhandho’’tiādīsu (vibha. 2) pana sakaloti āha ‘‘rūpādi…pe… attho’’ti. Avayavapadānañcettha visesanavisesitabbavisayānaṃ samānādhikaraṇatāya samudāyapadatthatā vuttā, tato eva samudāyapadānampi avayavapadatthatā. Na hi visesanavisesitabbānaṃ atthānaṃ accantaṃ bhedo abhedo vā icchito, atha kho bhedābhedo, tasmā abhedadassanavasena paṭhamanayo vutto, bhedadassanavasena dutiyanayo. Yo hi ruppanādisaṅkhāto rāsaṭṭho avayavapadehi rūpādisaddehi ca khandhasaddena ca visesanavisesitabbabhāvena bhinditvā vutto, svāyaṃ atthato rāsibhāvena apekkhito ruppanādiattho evāti.
就像用个别词来说时,整体词的含义也存在;同样,用整体词来说时,个别词的含义也存在。为了说明这一点,论师说“以色等个别词……说了句子清净分”。也就是说,在“色蕴既是色,也是色蕴;色蕴是色吗?是的”等表述中,做了句子清净。在这里,某些个别词用在别处时,由于个别词的含义可能成为整体词的含义,所以或许会有不确定性;但整体词并没有这种问题。因此,整体词的含义作为个别词的含义,并不存在相违。这在“色蕴是色吗?是的”等圣典文中已经阐明。所以说“为了显示色等……”巴利
Yathā avayavapadehi vuccamānopi samudāyapadassa attho hoti, evaṃ samudāyapadehi vuccamānopi avayavapadassa atthoti ‘‘rūpakkhandho rūpañceva rūpakkhandho ca, rūpakkhandho rūpanti? Āmantā’’tiādinā padasodhanā katāti dassento āha ‘‘rūpādiavayavapadehi…pe… padasodhanavāro vutto’’ti. Tattha ekaccassa avayavapadassa aññattha vuttiyā avayavapadatthassa samudāyapadatthatāya siyā anekantikatā, samudāyapadassa pana taṃ natthīti samudāyapadatthassa avayavapadatthatāya byabhicārābhāvo ‘‘rūpakkhandho rūpanti? Āmantā’’ti pāḷiyā pakāsitoti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpādi…pe… dassetu’’nti.
在“色蕴”等说法里,因为“蕴”的含义需要被限定,所以说了“作为主要的蕴这个词”。在“受蕴”等说法里,则是因为有“受”等前分词的含义。用“色”这个部分词所说的,也就是以被称为色的部分词、以限定的方式所说的“蕴”的含义,成为色蕴。因此说“色蕴是色吗?是的”。其中,“于此”指在那个色蕴这个词里。问:以作为主要的、应被限定的蕴这个部分词所说的变现之义,怎么会成为受蕴等呢?这是连接。意思是:在同样是部分词所表达的对象中,用非主要的词所理解的含义,为什么不能用主要的词来理解呢?用蕴这个部分词所说的法,指的是聚集之义。其中,“某个”指变现之义。“用某个整体词”指用色蕴这个词,而不是用受蕴等词。因此说“不是一切用一切”。这个道理也适用于受蕴等。通过色、色蕴等部分词与整体词的净化,以及在那里按四蕴方式展开的圣典脉络,就是句子净化根本轮。这样显示的人,就是在回顾那个由色等部分词和色蕴等整体词所显示的特殊含义。限定的性质,是因为能作区分,所以从普遍中加以限定;应被限定的性质,是因为以无差别的关系,所以不应从其他差别中割裂出来;同一所依的性质,是因为那些有差别和无差别的事物都依赖同一个基础。巴利
‘‘Rūpakkhandho’’tiādīsu khandhatthassa visesitabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘padhānabhūtassa khandhapadassā’’ti. Vedanādiupapadatthassa ca sambhavato ‘‘vedanākkhandho’’tiādīsu. Rūpāvayavapadena vuttassāti rūpasaṅkhātena avayavapadena visesanabhāvena vuttassa khandhatthassa rūpakkhandhabhāvo hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpakkhandho rūpanti? Āmantā’’ti. Tatthāti tasmiṃ rūpakkhandhapade. Padhānabhūtena visesitabbattā khandhāvayavapadena vuttassa ruppanaṭṭhassa kiṃ vedanākkhandhādibhāvo hotīti yojanā. Samāne avayavapadābhidheyyabhāve appadhānena padena yo attho viññāyati, so kasmā padhānena na viññāyatīti adhippāyo. Khandhāvayavapadena vutto dhammoti rāsaṭṭhamāha. Tattha kocīti ruppanaṭṭho. Kenaci samudāyapadenāti rūpakkhandhapadena, na vedanākkhandhādipadena. Tenāha ‘‘na sabbo sabbenā’’ti. Esa nayo vedanākkhandhādīsu. Rūparūpakkhandhādiavayavasamudāyapadasodhanamukhena tattha ca catukkhandhavasena pavattā pāḷigati padasodhanamūlacakkavāro. Evañca dassentenāti iminā yvāyaṃ rūpādiavayavapadehi rūpakkhandhādisamudāyapadehi ca dassitākāro atthaviseso, taṃ paccāmasati. Visesanabhāvo bhedakatāya sāmaññato avacchedakattā, visesitabbabhāvo abhedayogena bhedantarato avicchinditabbattā, samānādhikaraṇabhāvo tesaṃ bhedābhedānaṃ ekavatthusannissayattā.
“因此”是指前面所说的、由能区别与所区别的关系所限定。“此处”是指在同一个所依上。或者,“因此”是指以同一所依的关系为因;“此处”是指“色蕴”这个词。就像在“青莲花”这个词里,作为莲花之区别的“青”是特定的,不是什么随便的东西;同样,在这里,作为蕴之区别的“色”也应当是特定的。为了说明这一点,才说“从蕴来说是什么……呢?”同样,依“既是色又是蕴”这一同一所依的关系:凡是色,就是蕴;凡是蕴,就是色——这个意思也已经包含在内,所以说“一切……都应被区别”。而所谓区别,必须是以已确定的形态来限定,因为它是限定者,不是以未确定的形态,因此说“然而,那个……”等。他的意思是:因为只取了那个,所以并不是“可爱之色、可意之色”。因为那个并不是以蕴之区别的性质被执取的,回答正是针对那个而作的,这就是它们的连接。并不存在异于蕴的色——这是依“变坏之义就是色”来说的,因为那样的色并不脱离蕴而存在。正是因此,即依所说的色没有脱离蕴而存在。在“可爱之色、可意之色,以显示少许”等语句中,由于“色”这个词可以用在并非那个意思的地方,所以特别限定说“以那个色这个词”。
正在说的法,即使是以已生起的诸法为依,也还是有差别的。以纯粹的方式,即不借助“色”这个词,就是这个意思。这是就本论等所限定的范围来说的,或者就同一所依来说的。凡是与“色”这个词同一所依的“蕴”这个词,用那个所说的“色”这个词,就像前面那样,它的意思也被说到了。因此说“蕴就是色蕴”。即使所说的色就是蕴,但蕴并不就是色,所以说“并非一切……都应被区别”。正是因此,即依无色自性的蕴确实存在。那些就是蕴。应当加以分别,即抽出“蕴就是色蕴”这句话,然后以“色蕴既是蕴又是色蕴,其余的蕴不是色蕴”等方式,用分别来显示。巴利
Tenāti yathāvuttena visesanavisesitabbabhāvena. Etthāti etasmiṃ samānādhikaraṇe. Tenāti vā samānādhikaraṇabhāvena. Etthāti rūpakkhandhapade. Yathā nīluppalapade uppalavisesanabhūtaṃ nīlaṃ visiṭṭhameva hoti, na yaṃ kiñci, evamidhāpi khandhavisesanabhūtaṃ rūpampi visiṭṭhameva siyāti dassento ‘‘kiṃ khandhato…pe… hotī’’ti āha. Tathā ‘‘rūpañca taṃ khandho cā’’ti samānādhikaraṇabhāveneva yaṃ rūpaṃ, so khandho. Yo khandho, taṃ rūpanti ayampi āpanno evāti āha ‘‘sabbeva…pe… visesitabbā’’ti. Visesanena ca nāma niddhāritarūpena bhavitabbaṃ avacchedakattā, na aniddhāritarūpenāti āha ‘‘kiṃ pana ta’’ntiādi, tasseva gahitattā na piyarūpasātarūpassāti adhippāyo. Na hi taṃ khandhavisesanabhāvena gahitaṃ, vissajjanaṃ kataṃ tassevāti yojanā. Na khandhato aññaṃ rūpaṃ atthīti idaṃ ruppanaṭṭho rūpanti katvā vuttaṃ, na hi so khandhavinimutto atthi. Tenevāti yathāvuttarūpassa khandhavinimuttassa abhāveneva. ‘‘Piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, dassentenappaka’’nti ca ādīsu atadatthassa rūpasaddassa labbhamānattā ‘‘tena rūpasaddenā’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Vuccamānaṃ bhūtupādāyampi bhedaṃ dhammajātaṃ. Suddhenāti kevalena, rūpasaddena vināpīti attho. Tayidaṃ pakaraṇādiavacchinnataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, samānādhikaraṇataṃ vā. Yo hi rūpasaddena samānādhikaraṇo khandhasaddo, tena yathāvuttarūpasaddena viya tadattho vuccateva. Tenāha ‘‘khandhā rūpakkhandho’’ti. Yadipi yathāvuttaṃ rūpaṃ khandho eva ca, khandho pana na rūpamevāti āha ‘‘na ca sabbe…pe… visesitabbā’’ti. Tenevāti arūpasabhāvassa khandhassa atthibhāveneva. Teti khandhā. Vibhajitabbāti ‘‘khandhā rūpakkhandho’’ti padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘rūpakkhandho khandho ceva rūpakkhandho ca, avasesā khandhā na rūpakkhandho’’tiādinā vibhāgena dassetabbā.
对于“对于诸蕴,以色作为区别……会有疑惑”这一句,这里应当这样理解其关联:是否存在不同于蕴的受,使得被排除的受成为蕴的区别?以及,是否一切蕴都应当由作为蕴之区别的受来加以区别?“某些”,指以领纳等为行相者。“以某种区别”,指以受等为区别。巴利
Khandhānaṃ rūpavisesana…pe… saṃsayo hotīti ettha kiṃ khandhato aññāpi vedanā atthi, yato vinivattā vedanā khandhavisesanaṃ hoti, sabbe ca khandhā kiṃ khandhavisesanabhūtāya vedanāya visesitabbāti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Kecīti anubhavanādippakārā. Kenaci visesanenāti vedanādinā visesanena.
在这里,色的施设和蕴的施设,比如“色是蕴,诸蕴就是色蕴”等等,分别地或一起在色等含义上运作时,有时作为部分而运作,有时作为整体而运作。不过,当这种运作方式被确定下来之后,因为色等诸蕴在词和义两方面都得到了澄清,能够消除对该范围的疑惑,所以通过“色蕴既是色又是色蕴,色蕴是色吗?是的”这种理路所展开的第一轮,说明了:就像用部分的词来说部分之义一样,也用部分的词来说整体之义;同样,也用整体的词来说整体之义。而通过“色是色蕴,诸蕴是受蕴”这种理路所展开的第二轮,则说明了:就像用区别的词一样,用色等部分的词,也用作为共相且各自特定的蕴部分的词,来说明那各个整体之义,而不是指一切整体。由于不存在脱离蕴的所指定之色,所以蕴就是色,但并非一切蕴都是色,而只是其中一部分;受等也是如此。这个意思通过“色是蕴,诸蕴是色”这种理路所展开的第三轮显示出来。而通过“色是蕴,诸蕴是受蕴”这种理路所展开的第四轮,则说明了:当“色是蕴”确定了色的蕴性时,名为蕴的并不只是色,还有受等,从而阐明了受等也具有蕴性;并且,并非一切蕴都具有受等的区别。这样,这部巴利文典通过澄清上述施设的方式,有助于确定诸蕴的相同性,而这只是为了确定它们的生起等。对此,作者说“如是,对于这些人……应当了知”,以此加以说明。巴利
Ettha ca rūpādipaṇṇatti khandhapaṇṇatti ca ‘‘rūpaṃ khandho, khandhā rūpakkhandho’’tiādinā visuṃ saha ca ruppanādike atthe pavattamānā kadāci avayavabhūte pavattati, kadāci samudāyabhūte, tassā pana tathā pavattanākāre niddhārite yasmā rūpādikkhandhā padato atthato ca visodhitā nāma honti tabbisayakaṅkhāpanodanato, tasmā ‘‘rūpakkhandho rūpañceva rūpakkhandho ca, rūpakkhandho rūpanti? Āmantā’’tiādinayappavattena paṭhamavārena rūpādiavayavapadehi avayavattho viya samudāyatthopi vuccati, tathā samudāyapadehipīti ayamattho dassito. ‘‘Rūpaṃ rūpakkhandho, khandhā vedanākkhandho’’tiādinayappavattena pana dutiyavārena visesavācī viya rūpādiavayavapadehi sāmaññabhūtenapi taṃtaṃvisiṭṭhena khandhāvayavapadena so so eva samudāyattho vuccati, na sabboti ayamattho dassito. Khandhavinimuttassa yathādhippetassa abhāvā yadipi khandhoyeva rūpaṃ, so pana na sabbo rūpaṃ, atha kho tadekadeso, tathā vedanādayopīti ayamattho ‘‘rūpaṃ khandho, khandhā rūpa’’ntiādinayappavattena tatiyavārena dassito. ‘‘Rūpaṃ khandho, khandhā vedanākkhandho’’tiādinayappavattena pana catutthavārena ‘‘rūpaṃ khandho’’ti rūpassa khandhabhāve nicchite khandho nāmāyaṃ na kevalaṃ rūpameva, atha kho vedanādi cāti vedanādīnampi khandhabhāvappakāsane na sabbe khandhā vedanādivisesavanto, kecideva pana tena tena visesena tathā vuccantīti ayamattho dassito. Evaṃ dassentī cesā pāḷi khandhānaṃ yathāvuttapaṇṇattisodhanamukhena sarūpāvadhāraṇāya saṃvattati, tañca tesaṃ yāvadeva uppādādinicchayatthanti dassento ‘‘evaṃ yesaṃ…pe… veditabbo’’ti āha.
即使只就一部分来说,也能看到用整体来称呼的用法,比如“衣服被烧了”“大海被看见了”。所以论师说:“因为只是眼的一部分,所以两条眼根被说成‘眼’。”“绑缚后”是指以成对的状态绑缚,或者就是以成对为根本的状态来绑缚。以根本的状态来把握,就是连结关系;而这种连结关系,应当理解为像根本词等与车毂等之间的相似关系。由于没有先前未说过的内容可说,这里的开示并不是以圆轮的方式连结起来的,所以说“不是以圆轮的方式连结”。虽然以色蕴为根本并没有新内容,但在以受蕴等为根本、通过想等门类展开开示时,或许会有以圆轮方式连结的情况,但经典的文句并不是那样进行的,所以说“受蕴……以连结……”。因为后文与前文不相连结,这就是下文的净化。只取了纯粹的蕴之获得——即在“诸蕴即色”这里,用“蕴”这个词所获得的、不与色等混杂的、单纯的蕴义,以总说的方式取来。虽然在总说中,作为蕴之区分的色等,在“诸蕴即色”里只取了纯粹的色等本身,但因为不存在脱离区分的共相,所以不滞留在那里仅为纯粹的色等本身。这是为了显示被称为“蕴之区分性质”的状态——即按照所证得的、作为诸蕴区分性质而说的“被破坏”等区分之义。并非单单取那个,而是连同“蕴”这个词一起结合……由于分开说明,所以称为纯粹蕴之段。巴利
Ekadesepi samudāyavohāro dissati yathā paṭo daḍḍho, samuddo diṭṭhoti āha ‘‘cakkāvayavabhāvato cakkānīti yamakāni vuttānī’’ti. Bandhitvāti yamakabhāvena bandhitvā, yamakamūlabhāveneva vā. Mūlabhāvena gahaṇaṃ sambandhabhāvo, taṃsambandhatā ca mūlapadādīnaṃ nābhiādisadisatā daṭṭhabbā. Apubbassa vattabbassa abhāvato nayidha desanā maṇḍalabhāveneva sambajjhatīti āha ‘‘na maṇḍalabhāvena sambajjhanato’’ti. Yadipi rūpakkhandhamūlake apubbaṃ natthi, vedanākkhandhādimūlakesu pana saññādimukhena desanappavattiyaṃ apubbavaseneva gato siyā maṇḍalabhāvena sambandho, na tathā pāṭho pavattoti āha ‘‘vedanākkhandha…pe… sambandhenā’’ti. Pacchimassa purimena asambajjhanameva hi heṭṭhimasodhanaṃ. Suddhakkhandhalābhamattameva gahetvāti ‘‘khandhā rūpa’’nti ettha khandhāti khandhasaddena labbhamānaṃ rūpādīhi asammissaṃ khandhaṭṭhamattameva uddesavasena gahetvā. Yadipi uddese khandhavisesanaṃ rūpādi ‘‘khandhā rūpa’’nti suddharūpādimattameva gahitaṃ, tathāpi visesarahitassa sāmaññassa abhāvato tattha suddharūpādimattatāya aṭṭhatvā. Khandhavisesanabhāvasaṅkhātanti yathādhigataṃ khandhānaṃ visesanabhāvena kathitaṃ ruppanādikaṃ visesanatthaṃ dassetuṃ. Kevalameva taṃ aggaṇhanto khandhasaddena saha yojetvā…pe… vibhattattā suddhakkhandhavāroti vuttoti yojanā.
尼提沙品的解说巴利
Niddesavāravaṇṇanā
26 “如此说”是指:像这样,依照门与所缘,以及依门而生起的法的分别而说。“可爱的自性”就是“可爱之类”,就像在“贤友,色如何呢”等说法中那样,是依“可爱的自性”这一含义而说为“色”,不是依“变坏”的含义。所以说“可爱色……色不是色蕴”。即使依“变坏”的含义而属于色蕴的眼等法,由于这里只想用“可爱的自性”这个词来表述,所以也只归入“可爱色”,而不进入色蕴。因此说“可爱的自性……不是色蕴,如此而说”。当说到“然而在哪里有差异”时,“差异”这个词并不延续到后面,出于这个意思,所以说“是词的剩余”。因为对于从上下文已经能得到的词,并没有再补加的作用。或者,应把“见想”理解为词的抽出。而它的差异相,在“我将解说差异”这一承诺中就已经明显了。“其余诸行”在这里也是同样的道理。依结而了知、执取,所以想就是见,因此说“见就是想”。“以及见”中的“以及”一词,摄括剩余的戏论。因为这样,在“戏论想行”中,关于戏论的净化(中部义注1.201)说:“以想之名,说的就是戏论。”巴利
26.Evaṃvuttanti evaṃ dvārālambanehi saddhiṃ dvārappavattadhammavibhāgavasena vuttaṃ. Piyasabhāvaṃ piyajātikaṃ ‘‘kathaṃ rūpena kho, āvuso’’tiādīsu viya piyasabhāvaṭṭhena rūpaṃ, na ruppanaṭṭhenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘piyarūpaṃ…pe… rūpaṃ na rūpakkhandho’’ti. Ruppanaṭṭhena rūpakkhandhapariyāpannampi cakkhādi piyasabhāvamattavacanicchāvasena piyarūpameva anuppavisati, na rūpakkhandhanti āha ‘‘piyasabhāva…pe… na rūpakkhandhoti vutta’’nti. ‘‘Yo pana yattha viseso’’ti vutto visesasaddo nānuvattatīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘vacanaseso’’ti. Na hi adhikārato labbhamānassa ajjhāharaṇakiccaṃ atthi. Diṭṭhisaññāti vā paduddhāroyaṃ veditabbo. Visesatā panassā ‘‘visesaṃ vaṇṇayissāmā’’ti paṭiññāya eva pākaṭā. ‘‘Avasesā saṅkhārā’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Saṃyojanavasena jānāti abhinivisatīti saññā diṭṭhīti āha ‘‘diṭṭhi eva saññā’’ti. Diṭṭhi cāti ca-saddena avasiṭṭhaṃ papañcaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā hi ‘‘papañcasaññāsaṅkhā’’ti ettha papañcasūdaniyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.201) vuttaṃ ‘‘saññānāmena vā papañcā eva vuttā’’ti.
28 在“蕴即受蕴”这一随顺的说法中,可以透过如实显示自性来得到解答;但在“非蕴非受蕴”这一逆向的说法中,就不能这样。这里则是以遮遣的方式来作答。为了阐明这个意思,所以说:“没有‘蕴’这个词的运作,也没有‘受蕴’这个词的运作。”由此显示,这个“非”字是在否定其存在性。这里取用词语,是就词语的施设而言,或是就与词语同类的施设而言。这只是对施设的净化。因此说“只是做施设的净化而已”。以此显示:所要简别的其他法是不存在的。因此说“在这里,并没有其他法的自性可以作为标准”。“如是作已”等语句,则是用另一种读法来印证前面所说的义理。虽然在某些情况下,有蕴而没有受蕴,但绝不会有脱离蕴的自性的受,所以说“非蕴非受蕴吗?是的”,应当这样理解。因此义注中说“名为施设涅槃”等。巴利
28. ‘‘Khandhā vedanākkhandho’’ti etasmiṃ anulome yathā sarūpadassanena vissajjanaṃ labbhati, na evaṃ ‘‘na khandhā na vedanākkhandho’’ti paṭilome, idha pana paṭivacanena vissajjananti tadatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘khandhasaddappavattiyā ca abhāve vedanākkhandhasaddappavattiyā ca abhāvo’’ti āha. Tena sattāpaṭisedhe ayaṃ na-kāroti dasseti. Saddaggahaṇañcettha saddanibandhanattā paññattiyā saddasabhāgataṃ vā sandhāya kataṃ. Paṇṇattisodhanañhetaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paṇṇattisodhanamattameva karotī’’ti. Tena niddhāretabbassa dhammantarassa abhāvaṃ dasseti. Yato vuttaṃ ‘‘na aññadhammasabbhāvo evettha pamāṇa’’nti. Evañca katvātiādinā yathāvuttamatthaṃ pāṭhantarena samattheti. Kāmaṃ katthaci satipi khandhe natthi vedanākkhandho, akhandhattasabhāvā pana natthi vedanāti ‘‘na khandhā na vedanākkhandhoti? Āmantā’’ti vuttanti evaṃ vā etaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘paññattinibbānasaṅkhātā’’tiādi.
39 在“从色之外”这一句里,就像依于大种而生起的法一样,可爱的自性也被“色”这个词所指称的共同性所涵盖,所以说“应当看出超世间的感受等”。所谓“仅仅是没有生起”,是说在“蕴”这个词没有生起的时候,“色”这个词也没有生起,这只是就净除施设这一点来说的,因此又说“这样做了之后”等等。由此说明:就像除了眼之外,其他一切自性法都被“处”这个范畴所涵盖,没有任何法能脱离这两者,所以仅仅是为了净除施设,为了显示那不存在,才说“除了眼和处之外,其余既不是眼也不是处”;同样,这里也是为了这个意思,为了显示脱离这两者是不存在的,才说“除了色和蕴之外,其余既不是色也不是蕴”。这是不等的举例。因为在“除了眼和处之外”这一句里,被“其余”所涵盖的法根本不存在,所以可以说:脱离处的自性法是不存在的。因此说“如果有的话”。但在“除了色和蕴之外”这一句里,却不能这样说,因为脱离蕴的自性法是存在的。如果意思是说“没有那样属于蕴的法类”,才这样说,那么这样说是合理的。因此,义注里以“然而在义注中”等语句,只提取出施设。再把“渴爱的依处也不可能是被‘其余’所涵盖的”引进来连接。应当连接为“也可能是蕴”。巴利
39. ‘‘Rūpato aññe’’ti ettha bhūtupādāya dhammo viya piyasabhāvopi rūpasaddābhidheyyatāsāmaññena gahitoti āha ‘‘lokuttarā vedanādayodaṭṭhabbā’’ti. Appavattimattamevāti khandhasaddappavattiyā abhāve rūpasaddappavattiyā ca abhāvoti paṇṇattisodhanamattataṃyeva sandhāya vadati, tathā cāha ‘‘evañca katvā’’tiādi. Tenetaṃ dasseti – yathā cakkhuto aññassa sabbassapi sabhāvadhammassa āyatanaggahaṇena gahitattā tadubhayavinimuttaṃ kiñci natthīti kevalaṃ paññattisodhanatthaṃ tameva abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhuñca āyatane ca ṭhapetvā avasesā na ceva cakkhu na ca āyatana’’nti vuttaṃ, evamidhāpi tadatthameva ubhayavinimuttassa abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpañca khandhe ca ṭhapetvā avasesā na ceva rūpaṃ na ca khandhā’’ti vuttanti. Visamopaññāso. ‘‘Cakkhuñca āyatane ca ṭhapetvā’’ti ettha hi avasesaggahaṇena gayhamānaṃ kiñci natthīti sakkā vattuṃ āyatanavinimuttassa sabhāvadhammassa abhāvā. Tenāha ‘‘yadi siyā’’ti. ‘‘Rūpañca khandhe ca ṭhapetvā’’ti ettha pana na tathā sakkā vattuṃ khandhavinimuttassa sabhāvadhammassa atthibhāvato. Yadi pana tādisaṃ khandhagataṃ dhammajātaṃ natthīti evamidaṃ vuttaṃ siyā, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ siyā. Tathā hi ‘‘aṭṭhakathāyaṃ panā’’tiādinā paññattiggahaṇameva uddharīyati. Taṇhāvatthu ca na siyā avasesaggahaṇena gayhamānanti ānetvā sambandho. Khandho ca siyāti yojanā.
转起段的解说巴利
2. Pavattivāravaṇṇanā
50-205 在混合时分别的对法中,因为各词的时间不同,可能会有意义上的差别,所以说“在非混合时分别的段落中,没有意义上的差别”。现在用“前者的‘因为’”等话来阐明这个意思。“因此”就是指由于没有意义上的差别。“在此”是指在转起段的诵文这里,或者是指在转起段的解说这里。只说六种,不是九种,这就是要表达的意思。因此说“以过去”等。而说“这些三者”,是就自己另外紧接着显示的那三者而说的。如所示,在义注中应当分辨显示的相,在现在、过去等,在诵文中是直接呈现的。“并非另外存在”所说的含义,用“于各处的‘因为’”等话使它更加清楚。其中,以诸逆问,就是像“若某人的受蕴已生,其色蕴生起”等这样,在初句依逆转方式生起的。正是以此,才能依理趣结合。在混合时分别中也是如此,意思是不只在非混合时分别中有,也在混合时分别中有。并不是只因为不容易结合,前面才不结合,也是为了容易把握其义,所以说“非混合……所说”。巴利
50-205. Missakakālabhedesu yamakesu padānaṃ bhinnakālattā siyā atthavisesoti āha ‘‘amissakakālabhedesu vāresu atthavisesābhāvato’’ti. Idāni tamevatthaṃ ‘‘purimassa hī’’tiādinā vivarati. Tenāti atthavisesābhāvena. Etthāti etasmiṃ pavattivārapāṭhe, etissaṃ vā pavattivāravaṇṇanāyaṃ. Cha eva vuttā, na navāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘atītenā’’tiādi. Ete pana tayoti attanā visuṃ anantaraṃ dassite sandhāyāha. Yathādassitāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ niddhāretvā dassitabbākārā paccuppannenātītādayo ye pāḷiyaṃ ujukameva āgatā. ‘‘Na visuṃ vijjantī’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ ‘‘tattha tattha hī’’tiādinā pākaṭataraṃ karoti. Tattha paṭilomapucchāhīti ‘‘yassa vā pana vedanākkhandho uppajjittha, tassa rūpakkhandho uppajjatī’’ti evamādikāhi paṭhamapade vuttassa paṭilomavasena pavattāhi. Tenevāti nayato yojetuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā eva. Missakakālabhedesu cāti na kevalaṃ amissakakālabhedesuyeva, atha kho missakakālabhedesu cāti attho. Na yojanāsukaratāya eva purime ayojanā, atha kho sukhaggahaṇatthampīti dassento āha ‘‘amissaka…pe… vuttānī’’ti.
因为什么原因呢?是指这样一个原因:对于包含在一个双词组合里的诸蕴,其生起和灭尽的获得,也就是被称为“获得”的那个原因。按照先后顺序,前问和后问的名称已经说过了。通过“ca”这个词,应当确定并连接起来理解:前问和后问的名称也已经说过了。其中,“包含在一个双词组合里的”这一说法,应当作为一个整体来把握。接着用“因为对于那个……”等语句来阐明这个含义。其中,“对于那个”是指对于那个问题。这里所说的“问题”,应当理解为以提问方式说出来的话。因此说“由于总摄了应当填答的意义”。那个通过显示自身面貌而作出的解答,就是那个解答;或者,那个具有如上所说解答的,就是“具有那个解答的”,指的是那个解答。以第一部分,也就是以前面的列举词。因此,解答词在这里具有相同的意义,也就是相似的意义。以“一个词”,是指以一个主要和次要搭配的双词,而不是仅指第一个词,这是其含义。仅以生起和灭尽的获得为共同性,也就是仅以生起或灭尽可以被获得的相同性。“决定词……是合理的”这一段,是因为在注释书中以“在哪里色蕴不生起”等语句显示了前问,所以才这样说。虽然在那个地方因为解答为“生起”,而说了受蕴的生起可以被获得,但是,凡是决定词所包含的色蕴的不生起,在圣典中以被认可的方式而成立,依于这一点,前问是合理的,这就是其意图。这样,才以前一部分而具有相似的意义。巴利
Yena kāraṇenāti yena ekapadadvayasaṅgahitānaṃ khandhānaṃ uppādassa nirodhassa lābhasaṅkhātena kāraṇena. Yathākkamaṃ purepañho pacchāpañhoti ca nāmaṃ vuttaṃ. Ca-saddena purepacchāpañhoti ca nāmaṃ vuttanti niddhāretvā yojetabbaṃ. Tattha pana ‘‘ekapadadvayasaṅgahitāna’’nti idaṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā gahetabbaṃ. Tamevatthampi vivarati ‘‘yassa hī’’tiādinā. Tattha yassāti yassa pañhassa. ‘‘Pañho’’ti cettha pucchanavasena pavattaṃ vacanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘paripūretvā vissajjetabbatthasaṅgaṇhanato’’ti. Taṃ sarūpadassanena vissajjanaṃ taṃvissajjanaṃ, taṃ vā yathāvuttaṃ vissajjanaṃ etassāti taṃvissajjano, tassa taṃvissajjanassa. Purimakoṭṭhāsenāti purimena uddesapadena. Tena hi vissajjanapadassa samānatthatā idha sadisatthatā. Ekena padenāti ekena padhānāppadhānena yamakapadena, na paṭhamapadenevāti attho. Uppādanirodhalābhasāmaññamattenāti uppādassa vā nirodhassa vā labbhamānatāya samānatāmattena. Sanniṭṭhānapada…pe… yuttanti idaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘yattha rūpakkhandho nuppajjatī’’tiādinā purepañhassa dassitattā vuttaṃ. Yadipi tattha ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vissajjitattā vedanākkhandhassa uppādo labbhatīti vuttaṃ, yo pana sanniṭṭhānapadasaṅgahito rūpakkhandhassa anuppādo pāḷiyaṃ anuññātarūpena ṭhito, tassa vasena purepañho yuttoti adhippāyo. Evañhi purimakoṭṭhāsena sadisatthatā hoti.
在“若一个人的色蕴从未生起,那么他的受蕴也从未生起”这句话里,是通过否定色蕴从未生起这一点,来否定另一个蕴,所以这里主要说的是对色蕴本身的上述否定。其余类似的地方也是同样的道理,因此说“对决定意义的否定,就是否定”。而在“若一个人的色蕴生起,那么他的受蕴灭尽”这句话里,则是以色蕴的生起为特征来追问受蕴的灭尽,所以那个“不”的回答就被否定了。其余类似的地方也是同样的道理,因此说“排除疑惑之处,就是否定”。用“没有‘不’字”这句话,说明了否定之否定。如果是这样,那么圣典中的否定式回答和一般的否定有什么区别呢?所以说“在那里,生起……”等等。巴利
‘‘Yassa rūpakkhandho nuppajjittha, tassa vedanākkhandho nuppajjitthā’’ti ettha rūpakkhandhassa anuppannapubbatāpaṭikkhepamukhena itarassa paṭikkhipīyatīti rūpakkhandhasseva yathāvuttapaṭikkhepo padhānabhāvena vutto. Eseva nayo aññesupi edisesu ṭhānesūti āha ‘‘sanniṭṭhānatthasseva paṭikkhipanaṃ paṭikkhepo’’ti . ‘‘Yassa rūpakkhandho uppajjati, tassa vedanākkhandho nirujjhatī’’ti ettha pana rūpakkhandhassa uppādalakkhaṇaṃ katvā vedanākkhandhassa nirodho pucchīyatīti so eva ‘‘no’’ti paṭisedhīyati. Esa nayo aññesupi edisesu ṭhānesūti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṃsayatthanivāraṇaṃ paṭisedho’’ti. ‘‘Na-kāravirahita’’nti etena paṭisedhassa paṭisedhitamāha. Yadi evaṃ pāḷigatipaṭisedhavissajjanānaṃ ko visesoti āha ‘‘tattha uppattī’’tiādi.
所谓“以投入其一部分”,是指把四个问题和五个解答中的某一部分投入进去的方式。因此注释书里说:“在第一处,通过显示完整问题的前一部分的相似之处……”等等。为了说明在这里的问题和解答中,有二十七处可以获得投入,所以说了“就是完整的问题……”等等。从显示圣典的判定等开始,这里的“等”字,应当理解为涵盖了问题的分析、解答的位置、在一个问题中的连接方法等这些内容的集合。巴利
Tadekadesapakkhepavasenāti tesaṃ catunnaṃ pañhānaṃ pañcannañca vissajjanānaṃ ekadesassa pakkhipanavasena. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘paṭhame ṭhāne paripuṇṇapañhassa purimakoṭṭhāse sarūpadassanenā’’tiādi. Yo panettha pañhesu vissajjanesu ca sattavīsatiyā ṭhānesu pakkhepaṃ labhati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paripuṇṇapañho evā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pāḷivavatthānadassanāditoti ettha ādi-saddena pucchāvibhaṅgo vissajjanāṭhānāni ekasmiṃ pañhe yojanānayoti imesaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
从圣典中引出“净居天……”等句,是为了显示其中的含义。对于“若某人在某处色蕴未曾生起,则他在该处受蕴未曾生起”这一句,回答是“对于净居天,他们在那里……”。其中,“在同一地没有第二次转生”的意思是:在同一地,一位圣者不会再有第二次结生。至于第三次等,就更不用说了。为了显示这个含义是如何被说明的,所以说“因为从结生开始……已转起”。由此表明,这个开示是依长时与现在而展开的。当把业生相续视为一个整体,并依此而说生起与灭尽时,对于非业生的善法等,又该怎么解说呢?为了显示它们在这里也被视为依止于彼,所以说“因为在那时……已显示”。正是由此,即正是依于业生相续。因此,即因为将由一业所生的异熟相续视为一个整体。对于它,即对于业生相续。如同在五净居天中,各别地依所说圣典而了知“在同一地没有第二次转生”,同样地,从“净居天”这一无差别的说法,为什么不能了知在整个净居天中也没有第二次转生呢?提出这个问难后,为了自己作答,而说“但是为什么……”等语。其中,对于净居天中较低地者,若其根未成熟,则不能遮止其生于上地,因为经中说“上流”。所谓“上流”,即向上流注的渴爱与轮回之流。因此说“因为上流圣典存在”。应当对照比较,即应当这样理解,使其不相违背。也正是这样注释的。巴利
Suddhāvāsānantiādi pāḷiyā padaṃ uddharitvā atthadassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. ‘‘Yassa yattha rūpakkhandho nuppajjittha, tassa tattha vedanākkhandho nuppajjitthā’’ti imassa vissajjanaṃ hoti ‘‘suddhāvāsānaṃ tesaṃ tatthā’’ti. Tattha ekabhūmiyaṃ dutiyā upapatti natthīti ekissā bhūmiyā ekassa ariyapuggalassa dutiyavāraṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇaṃ natthīti attho. Tatiyavārādīsu vattabbameva natthi. Svāyamattho yathā ñāpito hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭisandhito pabhuti hi…pe… pavattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena addhāpaccuppannavasenāyaṃ desanā pavattāti dasseti. Ādānanikkhepaparicchinnaṃ kammajasantānaṃ ekattena gahetvā tassa vasena uppādanirodhesu vuccamānesu akammajesu kusalādīsu kathanti codanāyaṃ tepi idha taṃnissitā eva katāti dassento āha ‘‘tasmiñhi…pe… dassitā’’ti. Tenevāti kammajasantāneneva. Tasmāti ekakammanibbattassa vipākasantānassa ekattena gahitattā. Tassāti kammajasantānassa. Pañcasu suddhāvāsesu yathā paccekaṃ ‘‘ekissā bhūmiyā dutiyā upapatti natthī’’ti yathāvuttapāḷiyā viññāyati, evaṃ ‘‘suddhāvāsāna’’nti avisesavacanato sakalepi suddhāvāse sā natthīti tāya kasmā na viññāyatīti codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā sayameva pariharituṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha suddhāvāsesu heṭṭhābhūmikassa asati indriyaparipāke uparibhūmisamuppatti na sakkā paṭisedhetuṃ uddhaṃsotavacanato. Uddhamassa taṇhāsotaṃ vaṭṭasotañcāti hi uddhaṃsoto. Tenāha ‘‘uddhaṃsotapāḷisabbhāvā’’ti. Saṃsandetabbāti yathā na virujjhanti, evaṃ netabbā. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ.
“以此决定”,就是由标示了处所、非色法的生起所依这种决定。被区别出来的,是那些具有如此非色法性质的。即使是无想有情,意思是不只是五蕴有,无想有情也算在内。这里只取那些无想有情作为前一部分,这就是意图所在。因此,那些被决定所排除的,就是被如上所说的决定所远离的,他们不应被那样说,这就是意思。现在用“他们从那里……”等来显示。从那里,就是从无想有。对于最后有者,为了显示最后有的自相,说了“是五蕴有等吗”等话。即使不是最后有者的无色有众生,在无色有中,就像色蕴不生起一样,在那里最后有者的受蕴也不生起,所以说“因为被此决定所包含”。因此说“对于他们……说”。其中,“对于他们”是指最后有者。“在那里”是指在无色有中。“以及其他不生起的状态”,就是其他受蕴不生起的状态。即使是有结生的净居天,其诸蕴的坏灭也称为般涅槃,这是因为断除了粗重过失,以烦恼寂止的共通性而说的,应当这样理解。巴利
Etena sanniṭṭhānenāti aṅkitokāsabhāvirūpuppādasannissayena nicchayena. Visesitā tathābhāvirūpabhāvino. Asaññasattāpīti na kevalaṃ pañcavokārā eva, atha kho asaññasattāpi. Te eva asaññasatte eva gahetvā purimakoṭṭhāseti adhippāyo. Tena ye sanniṭṭhānena vajjitāti tena yathāvuttasanniṭṭhānena ye virahitā, te tathā na vattabbāti attho. Idāni ‘‘te tato’’tiādinā dasseti. Tatoti asaññābhavato. Pacchimabhavikānanti ettha pacchimabhavaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘kiṃ pañcavokārādī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Apacchimabhavikānampi arūpānaṃ arūpabhave yathā rūpakkhandho nuppādi, evaṃ tattha pacchimabhavikānaṃ vedanākkhandhopīti āha ‘‘etena sanniṭṭhānena saṅgahitattā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ…pe… āhā’’ti. Tattha tesanti pacchimabhavikānaṃ. Tatthāti arūpabhave. Itarānuppattibhāvañcāti itarassa vedanākkhandhassa anuppajjanasabbhāvampi. Sappaṭisandhikānampi suddhāvāsānaṃ khandhabhedassa parinibbānapariyāyo oḷārikadosappahānato kilesūpasamasāmaññena vuttoti veditabbaṃ.
“所谓‘彼等一切’”,是指安住在各自地界的一切净居天。而“犹如……”等语,只是把已经说过的意思表达得更清楚。“无边的世界界域”这句话,只是为了显示空间界域没有界限才说的。从补特伽罗的角度看,因为所依相同、时间也相同,所以不可能聚集在一起;但从空间界域的角度看却可能,因此他们就像混杂在一起一样,所以说“有混杂性”。巴利
Sabbesañhi tesanti taṃtaṃbhūmiyaṃ ṭhitānaṃ sabbesaṃ suddhāvāsānaṃ. Yathā panātiādinā vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ karoti. Anantā lokadhātuyoti idaṃ okāsassa paricchedābhāvaṃyeva dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Puggalavasena samānādhāratāya samānakālattena asambhavanto okāsavasena pana sambhavanto saṃkiṇṇā viya hontīti āha ‘‘saṃkiṇṇatā hotī’’ti.
3. 遍知品类的解说巴利
3. Pariññāvāravaṇṇanā
206-208 206-208. “Tassāpi”是说补特伽罗与空间这一章也(同样如此)。“Okāse puggalasseva”的意思是:在前面所说的空间当中,那个补特伽罗,也就是那位被空间所限定的补特伽罗本身。不过,就像补特伽罗章能够成立时,补特伽罗与空间这一章也能成立一样,空间章也应该能够成立——针对这个质疑,他说了“okāsavāropi ca”这句话。因此,正因为即使说到空间,也只是作为补特伽罗的差别特征来说的,并不是单独来说的,所以。巴利
206-208.Tassāpīti puggalokāsavārassapi. Okāse puggalassevāti yathāgahite okāse yo puggalo, tasseva okāsavisiṭṭhapuggalassevāti attho. Yathā pana puggalavāre labbhamāne puggalokāsavāropi labbhati, evaṃ okāsavāropi labbheyyāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘okāsavāropi cā’’ti. Tasmāti yasmā vuccamānopi okāso puggalassa visesabhāveneva vucceyya, na visuṃ, tasmā.
“Aññathā”的意思是:不像在转起章那样,把由执取和舍弃所限定的业生相续当作同一体来把握,而是依它的生灭来说遍知。之所以说“Yo rūpakkhandhaṃ parijānātī”这一句,是为了通过显示它并不包含决定句所摄的意义,来表明其他蕴也同样不存在,所以说“rupakkhandhaparijānanassa abhāvā”。而且回答了“Āmantā”,因此这里的意思是:在转起中,依心刹那可得三时。“Aggamaggasamaṅgiñca arahantañcā”这两个词,依次与“rūpakkhandhañca na parijānanti vedanākkhandhañca na parijānitthā”这两句相对应。而“Ṭhapetvā avasesā puggalā”则应分别与前后文连接。“Aggamagga…pe… natthī”这句话表明:只有阿拉汉道智,因为达到了遍知的顶点,才具有殊胜的遍知作用;由于其他道智没有达到这个顶点,所以没有这种作用。正因如此,只说它像金刚,而其余的则像闪电。所谓“Tena”,就是指前面所说的那句话。所谓“Tadavasesasabbapuggalā”,就是指除了具足最上道者之外其余的一切人。不过,为了避开前面所说的过失,他们说“这是针对凡夫等人而说的”。巴利
Aññathāti pavattivāre viya ādānanikkhepaparicchinnaṃ kammajasantānaṃ ekattena gahetvā tassa uppādanirodhavasena pariññāvacane. ‘‘Yo rūpakkhandhaṃ parijānātī’’ti sanniṭṭhānapadasaṅgahitatthābhāvadassanamukhena itarassapi abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rupakkhandhaparijānanassa abhāvā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Āmantā’’ti ca kataṃ, tasmā pavatte cittakkhaṇavasenevettha tayo addho labbhantīti attho. ‘‘Aggamaggasamaṅgiñca arahantañcā’’ti dvinnaṃ padānaṃ ‘‘rūpakkhandhañca na parijānanti vedanākkhandhañca na parijānitthā’’ti dvīhi padehi yathākkamaṃ sambandho. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā avasesā puggalā’’ti pana paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Aggamagga…pe… natthīti iminā arahattamaggañāṇasseva pariññāmatthakappattiyā pariññākiccaṃ sātisayaṃ, tadabhāvā na itaresanti dasseti. Yato tasseva vajirūpamatā vuttā, sesānañca vijjūpamatā. Tenāti tena yathāvuttena vacanena. Tadavasesasabbapuggaleti tato aggamaggasamaṅgito avasesasabbapuggale. Imaṃ pana yathāvuttadosaṃ pariharantā ‘‘puthujjanādayo sandhāyā’’ti vadanti.
3. 处双论巴利
3. Āyatanayamakaṃ
提纲章的注释巴利
Uddesavāravaṇṇanā
1-9 “依已说的方法”是指:按照“用部分词说出来的,是整体词含义的一部分或全部;而用整体词说出来的,则一定是部分词的含义”这类已经讲过的方法。这里通过显示前面所说的义注方法,说明在一切施设章等当中,应当随宜通达其含义。巴利
1-9.Vuttanayenāti ‘‘avayavapadehi vutto ekadeso sakalo vā samudāyapadānaṃ attho, samudāyapadehi pana vutto ekantena avayavapadānaṃ attho’’tiādinā vuttena nayena. Etena yathāvuttaatthavaṇṇanānayadassanatāya sabbapaṇṇattivārādīsu yathārahaṃ attho netabboti dasseti.
详解章的注释巴利
Niddesavāravaṇṇanā
10-17 “散布”是指遍满自己的范围而运作。就像在香处可以遇到那样,在戒等处也可以遇到,所以经中说“戒香”等,是把“戒等本身就是香”来说的。因此,注释书里说“戒香……名”等。然而,因为遍满自己的范围在那里就是遍满的状态或明显的状态,所以说“以散布之义,或以明显之义”。“散布”也指指示自己的依据。在“天众聚集”“施设法”等说法中,“身”和“法”这些词也用来表示聚集的假立,所以用“有自性”来加以区分。以“身”一词……不存在,这句话是针对“不是法,不是处”中的“法”一词,指它表示除特定概念之外的一切有自性之法,而不是指称为法处的特定之法,应当这样理解。巴利
10-17.Vāyanaṃ savisayaṃ byāpetvā pavattanaṃ, tayidaṃ yathā gandhāyatane labbhati, evaṃ sīlādīsupīti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sīlagandho’’tiādi vuttaṃ ‘‘sīlādiyeva gandho’’ti katvā. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sīlagandho…pe… nāmānī’’ti. Yasmā pana savisayabyāpanaṃ tattha pasaṭabhāvo pākaṭabhāvo vā hoti, tasmā ‘‘pasāraṇaṭṭhena pākaṭabhāvaṭṭhena vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Attano vatthussa sūcanaṃ vā vāyanaṃ. ‘‘Devakāyā samāgatā (dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37), paṇṇattidhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. dukamātikā 108) samūhapaññattīsupi kāyadhammasaddā āgatāti ‘‘sasabhāva’’nti viseseti. Kāyavacanena…pe… natthīti idaṃ ‘‘na dhammo nāyatana’’nti ettha dhammasaddassa vinivattavisesasabbasabhāvadhammavācakataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na dhammāyatanasaṅkhātadhammavisesavācakatanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
转起章的注释巴利
2. Pavattivāravaṇṇanā
18-21 18-21. 在“转起章”这一段里。“仅以提问而得”这句话,是在说明提问没有意义这件事。“一一”指的是“眼处生起的人,声处也生起吗?”这一类逐一提出的问题。“五”指的是“声处生起的人,香处也生起吗?”等五个问题。虽然承认“仅以提问而得”可以归入其中,但他又说“应当以解答的方式舍断”。用“将说……”等语句,在注释书中论证了前面所说的含义。巴利
18-21.Etasminti pavattivāre. Pucchāmattalābhenāti moghapucchābhāvamāha. Ekekanti ‘‘yassa cakkhāyatanaṃ uppajjati, tassa saddāyatanaṃ uppajjatī’’tiādikaṃ ekekaṃ. Pañcāti ‘‘yassa saddāyatanaṃ uppajjati, tassa gandhāyatanaṃ uppajjatī’’tiādīni pañca. Pucchāmattalābhena saṅgahaṃ anujānanto ‘‘vissajjanavasena hāpetabbānī’’ti āha. ‘‘Vakkhati hī’’tiādinā yathāvuttamatthaṃ aṭṭhakathāya samattheti.
“相似解答”这个通称,其实只落在具体的区分上。为了说明这个区分,先说了“这是针对补特伽罗章而说的”;接着又因为这种相似解答并不遍及一切,为了说明在相似的地方也有解答,就说“但在空间章……乃至……已解答”。这里“那”是指第二个。“在补特伽罗章中也一样”的意思是:凡有相似解答的地方,在补特伽罗章中也有解答,在空间章中就更不用说了。“由离欲之业所生”是说:靠修习的力量而离欲,欲因此远离,所以叫“离欲”,也就是色界业;由这种业所生的。“结生本身就是种子,所以叫结生种子”,是属于这结生种子的。“因为是这样的性质”这句话,是在说明鼻等诸处决定是以欲贪为根源的业为因。而“香等也不存在”是说香等完全不存在,这是就它们彻底没有而说的。这里应当说的,前面已经说过了。巴利
Sadisavissajjananti sāmaññavacanaṃ visesaniviṭṭhameva hotīti taṃ visesaṃ dassento ‘‘puggalavārameva sandhāya vutta’’nti vatvā tassā pana sadisavissajjanatāya abyāpitattā yattha sadisaṃ, tatthāpi vissajjitanti dassento ‘‘okāsavāre pana…pe… vissajjita’’nti āha. Tattha tanti dutiyaṃ. Puggalavārepīti yattha sadisaṃ vissajjanaṃ, tattha puggalavārepi vissajjitaṃ, pageva okāsavāreti adhippāyo. Virattakāmakammanibbattassāti bhāvanābalena viratto kāmo etenāti virattakāmaṃ, rūpāvacarakammaṃ, tato nibbattassa. Paṭisandhi eva bījaṃ paṭisandhibījaṃ, tassa. ‘‘Evaṃsabhāvattā’’ti etena ekantato kāmataṇhānidānakammahetukāni ghānādīnīti dasseti. Gandhādayo ca na santīti sabbena sabbaṃ tesampi abhāvaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
“真实”应当按前面所说的方式去理解。接受了提问者所说的意思之后,为了说明那些成对问题是以什么意图而具有相似的解答,所以说了“然而,如同……”等话。这里的大意是:在那些以眼处为根本的成对问题中,鼻处成对问题以“对于有眼而无鼻而结生者”这样的方式,与舌处、身处成对问题有相似的解答;同样,在这里以鼻处为根本的成对问题中,鼻处成对问题与那些舌处、身处成对问题,以“若某人的鼻处生起,他的舌处是否也生起?是的”这类方式有相似解答。如此,这里是由于二者分别彼此有相似解答而说此,并非由于合并彼此有相似解答。因此说“所以在彼彼处的相似解答性,并非载入经文的原因”。若如此,以眼处为根本的提取有什么用呢?故说“以示例的方式”等。这里所说的“以示例的方式”,意思是:仅以作为示例的、彼此相似解答性这一示例方式,而非以它们与所应示例者完全有相似解答的方式,这是意图所在。为了显示所说的“以多数性”,故说“因为在它们当中……”等。巴利
‘‘Sacca’’nti yathāvuttavasena gahetabbaṃ codakena vuttamatthaṃ sampaṭicchitvā puna yenādhippāyena tāni yamakāni sadisavissajjanāni, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – tattha cakkhāyatanamūlakesu ghānāyatanayamakena ‘‘sacakkhukānaṃ aghānakānaṃ upapajjantāna’’ntiādinā nayena jivhākāyāyatanayamakāni yathā sadisavissajjanāni, tathā idha ghānāyatanamūlakesu ghānāyatanayamakena tāni jivhākāyāyatanayamakāni ‘‘yassa ghānāyatanaṃ uppajjati, tassa jivhāyatanaṃ uppajjatīti? Āmantā’’tiādinā nayena sadisavissajjanānīti. Evamettha ubhayesaṃ visuṃ aññamaññaṃ sadisavissajjanatāya idaṃ vuttaṃ, na ekajjhaṃ aññamaññaṃ sadisavissajjanatāya. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā tattha tattheva sadisavissajjanatā pāḷianāruḷhatāya kāraṇa’’nti. Evañca sati cakkhāyatanamūlaggahaṇaṃ kimatthiyanti āha ‘‘nidassanabhāvenā’’tiādi. Tattha nidassanabhāvenāti nidassanabhūtānaṃ aññamaññasadisavissajjanatāsaṅkhātena nidassanabhāveneva, na pana tesaṃ nidassitabbehi sabbathā sadisavissajjanatāyāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Yebhuyyatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ yebhuyyataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tesu hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“如此”这个词,是通过“是的”这种回答式的解答,引出这样一个意思:应当承认前面所说的就是解答。“那”是指第二个问题。“以鼻处那一对”是指在以眼处为根本的诸对当中,就是那以鼻处为一对的部分。“与它一起的其余部分”是指和那个以鼻处为根本的身处那一对一起的其余部分。关于“由于是相似的解答所以没有载入”这一句,这里只是“没有载入”这一点被“同样”这个词带出来,并不是说“由于是相似的解答”。为了说明这一点,先说了“同样……以原因的共通性”,现在为了说明那里并没有所说的“相似的解答”,所以接着说了“然而,鼻、舌、身处……”等话。其中,“在非胎生者当中生起的”这里,也要把“由于俱存”这个词带进来连接,同样,“在胎生者当中生起的”也是如此。应当这样连接起来理解:其余两个以鼻处为根本的舌处、身处对句不被解答;而在以鼻处为根本的诸对被解答之后,另外两个为根本的、以舌处和身处为根本的诸对也不被解答,因为没有差别和差别很小。其中,在身处那一对里,依第二个问题而有少许差别,依其余情况则是没有差别,应当这样理解。“与色处、意处一起”这句话,是依色处为根本的意处而说的,所以说“色处……意图”。因此又说“因为在以色处为根本的当中……”等等。“诸对”是指以色处为根本的香、味、触处诸对。“第二个问题”就是前面所说的那些对的第二个问题。“依所说的方式”就是依“对于有色者、无心者……”等所说的方式。“最初的问题”就是那些对的第一个问题。巴利
Evanti iminā ‘‘āmantā’’ti paṭivacanavissajjanena yathāvuttavacanasseva vissajjanabhāvānujānanaṃ kattabbanti imamatthaṃ ākaḍḍhati. Sāti dutiyapucchā. Ghānāyatanayamakenāti cakkhāyatanamūlakesu ghānāyatanayamakeneva. Taṃsesānīti tena ghānāyatanamūlakakāyāyatanayamakena saddhiṃ sesāni. Sadisavissajjanattā anāruḷhānīti ettha ‘‘anāruḷhānī’’ti ettakameva tathā-saddena anukaḍḍhīyati, na ‘‘sadisavissajjanattā’’ti dassento ‘‘tathāti…pe… samaññenā’’ti vatvā idāni ‘‘kāraṇasāmaññenā’’ti vuttassa sadisavissajjanattassa tattha abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ghānajivhākāyāyatanānaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha agabbhaseyyakesu pavattamānānanti etthāpi ‘‘sahacāritāyā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ, tathā ‘‘gabbhaseyyakesu ca pavattamānāna’’nti. Itarāni ghānāyatanamūlakāni jivhākāyāyatanayamakāni dve na vissajjīyanti, ghānāyatanamūlakesu ca yamakesu vissajjitesu itaradvayamūlakāni jivhākāyāyatanamūlakāni na vissajjīyanti avisesattā appavisesattā cāti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha kāyāyatanayamake dutiyapucchāvasena appaviseso, itaravasena aviseso veditabbo. Rūpāyatanamanāyatanehi saddhinti idaṃ rūpāyatanamūlakamanāyatanavasena vuttanti āha ‘‘rūpāyatana…pe… adhippāyo’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘rūpāyatanamūlakesu hī’’tiādi. Yamakānanti rūpāyatanamūlakagandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanayamakānaṃ. Dutiyapucchānanti yathāvuttayamakānaṃyeva dutiyapucchānaṃ. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘sarūpakānaṃ acittakāna’’ntiādinā vuttena nayena. Ādipucchānanti tesaṃyeva yamakānaṃ paṭhamapucchānaṃ.
“较低的那些”这个说法本身并不作区分,它是针对那些可以有相似回答的情况而说的,所以接着说“香、味……含义”。对于已列举的诸法,按照列举而作出的差别说明就是回答;其中,如果某法并不能完全按照列举所对应的功德而找到,那么即使不说它,在意义上也仍然算是已回答,所以说“以不回答的方式,通过显示其不可得,就称为已回答”。巴利
Heṭṭhimehīti idaṃ avisesavacanampi yesu sadisavissajjanatā sambhavati, tadapekkhanti āha ‘‘gandharasa…pe… attho’’ti. Uddiṭṭhadhammesu uddesānurūpaṃ labbhamānavisesakathanaṃ vissajjanaṃ, yo tattha na sabbena sabbaṃ uddesānurūpaguṇena upalabbhati, tassa akathanampi atthato vissajjanameva nāma hotīti āha ‘‘avissajjaneneva alabbhamānatādassanena vissajjitāni nāma hontī’’ti.
就像眼有残缺、耳有残缺的情况一样,也有眼和耳都残缺的情况可以找到,而他在注释书里用“pi”这个字把它也包括进去了。为了说明这一点,就说“即使是生来眼盲……也应了知”。说“只是指诸根具足的化生者”:在这里,为了指出“eva”这个词适用的地方,说“就是已经说过的意思”。接着,为了说明因此诸根具足的化生者在这一点上并不是确定的,诸根不具足的化生者也被包含在内,就说“因此,就生来眼盲、耳聋者而说的这一说法并没有被排除”。巴利
Cakkhuvikalasotavikalā viya cakkhusotavikalopi labbhatīti so pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pi-saddena saṅgahitoti dassento ‘‘jaccandhampi…pe… veditabbo’’ti āha. Paripuṇṇāyatanameva opapātikaṃ sandhāya vuttanti ettha aṭṭhānappayutto eva-saddoti tassa ṭhānaṃ dassento ‘‘vuttamevāti attho’’ti vatvā tena paripuṇṇāyatanassa tattha aniyatattā aparipuṇṇāyatanassapi saṅgaho siddhoti dassento ‘‘tena jaccandhabadhirampi sandhāya vuttatā na nivāritā hotī’’ti āha.
22-254 为什么说“于彼,由于补特伽罗未被触及”?因为即使以“他问色界梵天”这句话,处所也已经被触及了。怀着说明“是的”这一承认之理由的意图,先提出“为何被承认”的诘问,然后为了揭示那个理由,而说“难道不是……”等。说“将进入胎生状态而般涅槃”,是指最后有者。说“处于彼状态者”,即处于最后有状态者。说“将是者”,即未来者。说“由于应被承认”,即由于应以“将生起”来承认。巴利
22-254.Tasmiṃ puggalassa anāmaṭṭhattāti kasmā vuttaṃ, yāvatā ‘‘rūpībrahmalokaṃ pucchatī’’ti imināpi okāsoyeva āmaṭṭhoti. ‘‘Āmantā’’ti paṭiññāya kāraṇavibhāvanādhippāyeneva ‘‘kasmā paṭiññāta’’nti codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā taṃ kāraṇaṃ dassetukāmo ‘‘nanū’’tiādimāha . Gabbhaseyyakabhāvaṃ gantvā parinibbāyissatīti pacchimabhavikaṃ sandhāyāha. Tadavatthassāti pacchimabhavāvatthassa. Bhavissantassāti bhāvino. Paṭiññātabbattāti ‘‘uppajjissatī’’ti paṭiññātabbattā.
那么为什么在此的简略义是——如果在“若某人的色处将生起,则其眼处将生起”这个问句中,按照所说的方式应当承认,那么为什么、以什么理由,在反过来的“若某人的色处将不生起,则其眼处将不生起”这个问句中,却回答“是的”呢?这难道不是互相矛盾吗?问难者正是用“难道不是”等话来揭示这个矛盾。“并非不生起,而是将生起”,这就是它的意思。“在那个有中”等话是对这个问题的答复。其中,“在那个有中”是指在那个有当中,因为被说为“色处将不生起”是就正在发生的状态而言的。由于不能用未来状态来说,也就是因为不能以未来状态来说,所以意思是:它已经开始了生起、正在发生。正因如此才说“因为在别的有中”等话。关联是“但不说”。通过“如此做了之后”等另一读本,来证成如上所说的含义。巴利
Atha kasmāti etthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yadi ‘‘yassa rūpāyatanaṃ uppajjissati, tassa cakkhāyatanaṃ uppajjissatī’’ti pucchāyaṃ vuttena vidhinā paṭiññātabbaṃ, atha kasmā atha kena kāraṇena paṭilome ‘‘yassa vā pana rūpāyatanaṃ nuppajjissati, tassa cakkhāyatanaṃ nuppajjissatī’’ti pucchāya ‘‘āmantā’’ti paṭiññātaṃ, nanu idaṃ aññamaññaṃ viruddhanti? Nanūtiādināpi codako tameva virodhaṃ vibhāveti. No ca nuppajjissati uppajjissati evāti attho. ‘‘Tasmiṃ bhave’’tiādi tassa parihāro. Tattha tasmiṃ bhaveti yasmiṃ bhave ‘‘rūpāyatanaṃ nuppajjissatī’’ti vuttaṃ pavattamānattā, tasmiṃ bhave. Anāgatabhāvena avacanatoti bhāvībhāvena avattabbato āraddhuppādabhāvena pavattamānattāti adhippāyo. Tenevāha ‘‘bhavantare hī’’tiādi. Na pana vuccatīti sambandho. Evañca katvātiādinā pāṭhantarena yathāvuttamatthaṃ samattheti.
在某个自体当中,要由哪些处才能存在,对于那个必定会生起各处之处的有情或心相续来说,这是由能产生各个处的业所决定的。因此,这样的两组问答——“如果某人的色处将会生起,那他的眼处也会生起吗?是的。”“如果某人的色处将不会生起,那他的眼处也不会生起吗?是的。”——因为处的获得本质上就是生起,所以这样成立是非常合理的。说到“最后有者等”,这里的“等”字包含了那些投生到无色界之后般涅槃的有情。这也是一种回答。因为应当随喜,意思就是应当以“是的”来接受。巴利
Yasmiṃ attabhāve yehi āyatanehi bhavitabbaṃ, taṃtaṃāyatananibbattakakammena avassaṃbhāvīāyatanassa sattassa, santānassa vā, ‘‘yassa vā pana rūpāyatanaṃ uppajjissati, tassa cakkhāyatanaṃ uppajjissatīti? Āmantā, yassa vā pana rūpāyatanaṃ nuppajjissati, tassa cakkhāyatanaṃ nuppajjissatīti? Āmantā’’ti ca evaṃ pavattaṃ pucchādvayavissajjanaṃ āyatanapaṭilābhassa jātibhāvato suṭṭhu upapannaṃ bhavati. Pacchimabhavikādayoti ettha ādi-saddena arūpe uppajjitvā parinibbāyanakā saṅgayhanti. Idampi vissajjanaṃ. Abhinanditabbattāti ‘‘āmantā’’ti sampaṭicchitabbattā.
“然而,所谓‘无鼻者往生欲界’这一说法,是有关联的。”这是说:那种业的果报,会在鼻处生起之前就中断,这就叫作不产生鼻处之业。那么,怎么知道有这种业呢?为了说明这一点,就说了“对于某人,在某处”等话。即便如此,这里所说的“无鼻者”,正是指胎生者。这一点又怎么知道呢?针对这个问难,说了“因为不”等之后,为了证成这个道理,又说了“在《法心分别》中”等。因为在如法教说的阿毗达摩中,不作宣说就等于否定。这里,是指这部《双论》中。如所开示的,就是在“若某人的耳处将不生起,则其眼处不生起;若某人在某处鼻处不灭,则其彼处色处将不灭”等所示方式的那些问题中。说了“是”,那为什么还不被了解呢?这是连接。意思是:在这些问题中,为什么不用回答来作答复呢?因为以决定词所把握的意义——也就是像“若某人的耳处将不生起”等以决定词所把握的意义——在某一分中存在着应被疑惑的意义,对于与决定意义相反的疑惑意义不作答复,不应以“是”来作回答的答复,不应把意义不加区分地合在一起说。因此说:“对于应分开的,没有回答的答复。”巴利
Yaṃ pana aghānakānaṃ kāmāvacaraṃ upapajjantānanti vuttanti sambandho. Yassa vipāko ghānāyatanuppattito puretarameva upacchijjissati, taṃ ghānāyatanānibbattakakammanti vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ panīdisaṃ kammaṃ atthīti viññāyatīti āha ‘‘yassa yatthā’’tiādi. Evampi gabbhaseyyako eva idha aghānakoti adhippetoti kathamidaṃ viññāyatīti codanāya ‘‘na hī’’tiādiṃ vatvā tamatthaṃ sādhetuṃ ‘‘dhammahadayavibhaṅge’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Avacanattampi hi yathādhammasāsane abhidhamme paṭikkhepoyevāti . Idhāti imasmiṃ āyatanayamake. Yathādassitāsūti ‘‘yassa vā pana sotāyatanaṃ nuppajjissati, tassa cakkhāyatanaṃ nuppajjati, yassa yattha ghānāyatanaṃ na nirujjhati, tassa tattha rūpāyatanaṃ na nirujjhissatī’’ti ca dassitappakārāsu pucchāsu. Āmantāti vuttanti atha kasmā na viññāyatīti yojanā. Etāsu pucchāsu kasmā paṭivacanena vissajjanaṃ na katanti adhippāyo. Sanniṭṭhānena gahitatthassāti ‘‘yassa vā pana sotāyatanaṃ nuppajjissati, yassa yattha ghānāyatanaṃ na nirujjhissatī’’ti ca evamādikena sanniṭṭhānapadena gahitassa atthassa. Ekadese saṃsayatthassa sambhavenāti ekadese saṃsayitabbassa atthassa sambhavena sanniṭṭhānatthapaṭiyogabhūtasaṃsayatthassa paṭivacanassa akaraṇato ‘‘āmantā’’ti paṭivacanavissajjanassa akattabbato atthassa abhinditvā ekajjhaṃ katvā avattabbato. Tenāha ‘‘bhinditabbehi na paṭivacanavissajjanaṃ hotī’’ti.
“若有”这句话的意思是:即使按照应当分开来说的义理,如果有回答式的答复,那也不会是完整的答复,因为它没有余地,而且应当分开来说。正如“在五蕴有中般涅槃的众生、在无色界中最后有的众生,以及那些投生无色界之后将般涅槃的众生,他们死没时,耳处不生起,眼处也不生起”,还有“在色界般涅槃的众生、无色界的众生,他们在那里鼻处不灭,色处也不灭”——这是依分别而展开的剩余经文。那么,为什么说如果对不应分开的给予了回答式的答复,而对应当分开的却没有,既然如此,通过“若某人的喜根生起,则其眼根生起吗?是的”这一回答式的答复,为什么不能理解胎生者没有喜俱结生呢?难道应当分开的反而没有回答式的答复,这可以接受吗?不是这样的。因为通过其他经文可以了知那个义理,为了说明这一点,才说了“在欲界”等。巴利
Yadi siyāti bhinditvā vattabbepi atthe yadi paṭivacanavissajjanaṃ siyā, paripuṇṇavissajjanameva na siyā anokāsabhāvato bhinditabbato cāti attho. Tathā hi ‘‘pañcavokāre parinibbantānaṃ, arūpe pacchimabhavikānaṃ, ye ca arūpaṃ upapajjitvā parinibbāyissanti, tesaṃ cavantānaṃ tesaṃ sotāyatanañca nuppajjissati, cakkhāyatanañca nuppajjatī’’ti ca, tathā ‘‘rūpāvacare parinibbantānaṃ, arūpānaṃ tesaṃ tattha ghānāyatanañca na nirujjhati, rūpāyatanañca na nirujjhissatī’’ti ca tattha vibhāgavasena pavatto pāṭhaseso. Atha kasmāti yadi abhinditabbe paṭivacanavissajjanaṃ, na bhinditabbe, evaṃ sante ‘‘yassa vā pana somanassindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa cakkhundriyaṃ uppajjatīti? Āmantā’’ti iminā paṭivacanavissajjanena gabbhaseyyakānaṃ somanassapaṭisandhi natthīti kasmā na viññāyati, bhinditabbe na paṭivacanavissajjanaṃ hotīti sampaṭicchitabbanti? Taṃ na, aññāya pāḷiyā tadatthassa viññāyamānattāti dassento ‘‘kāmadhātuyā’’tiādimāha.
如果有一个心生起后并不灭去,那个心将来会灭去、不再生起吗?回答是:是的。正如对于那个心,在它生起的那一刹那,它的灭是以“未来”的方式来说的;同样,对于那个业所生的相续,在它生起时,它的灭也应当以“未来”的方式来说。由此就说明了这一点:单单一个心,在它生起的刹那,它的灭就已经以“未来”的方式被说了,更何况是一个相续呢?在一切地方、一切未来分的讨论中都是如此。对于正在投生的人来说,那个灭也只是以“未来”的方式被说。那么,为什么在这里不说已投生者的灭呢?所以他说“然而对于已生起者”等等。这正是针对那个如其所转起的业所生相续而言。之所以这样说,是因为从生起那一刹那之后,灭就已经被称为开始了。即使有区别,也因为时间的区别没有被触及。正是依未来时的触及、依灭本身,那两种回答才成立、才恰当。由于不可能依其他方式来说灭,所以才说“阿拉汉”。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati, na nirujjhati, taṃ cittaṃ nirujjhissati, nuppajjissatīti? Āmantā’’ti tasseva cittassa nirodho anāgatabhāvena tassa uppādakkhaṇe yathā vutto, evaṃ tasseva kammajasantānassa nirodho tassa uppāde anāgatabhāvena vattabbo. Tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘ekacittassa nāma uppādakkhaṇe nirodho anāgatabhāvena vuccati, kimaṅgaṃ pana ekasantānassā’’ti . Sabbattha sabbasmiṃ anāgatavāre. Upapajjantānaṃ eva vasena so nirodho tathā anāgatabhāvena vutto, kasmā panettha nirodho upapannānaṃ vasena na vuttoti āha ‘‘uppannānaṃ panā’’tiādi. Tasseva yathāpavattassa kammajasantānassa eva. Tasmāti yasmā uppādakkhaṇato uddhaṃ nirodho āraddho nāma hoti, tasmā. Bhede satipi kālabhedāmasanassa kāraṇe satipi. Anāgatakālāmasanavaseneva nirodhasseva vasena vissajjanadvayaṃ upapannameva yuttameva hotīti. Aññesaṃ vasena nirodhasseva vattuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā ‘‘arahata’’nti vuttaṃ.
如果有人问:如果结生之后紧接着就开始了灭,那为什么经典里说死的时候才是灭?针对这个问难,注释者说:“然而,因为那是该相续的终结,所以说死的时候才是灭。”“因为那是终结”,意思是那是该相续的结束。“转起”等话,是为了把前面已经说过的义理讲清楚。其中,“该”指的是相续。“他将说”等话,也是因为不把灭放在转起阶段,而只取死时的灭,所以是说明理由的话。“由此”,指由前面所说的那种异本的说法。“在此”,指在“眼处将灭”等所在的《处双论》中。如果即使在转起阶段已经灭了的,也只承认死时才是灭,那么“有眼者”等话又怎么解释呢?于是他说:“而在‘有眼者’等中,其义应理解为‘已得眼者’等。”“他们”,指无色界中最后一生的人。“无眼”这句话,是“有余”的说法,应当这样连接理解。巴利
Yadi upapattianantaraṃ nirodho āraddho nāma hoti, atha kasmā cutiyā nirodhavacananti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tanniṭṭhānabhāvato pana cutiyā nirodhavacana’’nti. Tanniṭṭhānabhāvatoti tassa santānassa niṭṭhānabhāvato. Pavattetiādi vuttassevatthassa pākaṭakaraṇaṃ. Tattha tassāti santānassa. Vakkhatītiādipi pavatte nirodhaṃ anādiyitvā cutinirodhasseva gahitatāya kāraṇavacanaṃ. Tenāti tena yathāvuttena pāṭhantaravacanena. Etthāti etasmiṃ ‘‘yassa cakkhāyatanaṃ nirujjhissatī’’tiādike āyatanayamake. Yadi pavatte niruddhassapi cutiyā eva nirodho icchito, ‘‘sacakkhukāna’’ntiādi kathanti āha ‘‘sacakkhukānantiādīsu ca paṭiladdhacakkhukānantiādinā attho viññāyatī’’ti. Teti arūpe pacchimabhavikā. Acakkhukavacanañca sāvasesanti yojanā.
1-19 “与声界相关的”这句话,是针对那些以眼界等为根本的声双论,以及一切以声界为根本的双论而说的。因为它们并不像与眼识界等相关的双论那样,可以依死亡与结生的方式而成立。也正是由于这一点,应当知道:在处双论的转起部分中,与声界相关的双论也是找不到的。巴利
1-19.Saddadhātusambandhānanti idaṃ yāni cakkhudhātādimūlakesu saddayamakāni, sabbāni ca saddadhātumūlakāni, tāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Na hi tāni cakkhuviññāṇadhātādisambandhāni viya cutipaṭisandhivasena labbhanti, eteneva āyatanayamakepi pavattivāre saddadhātusambandhānaṃ yamakānaṃ alabbhamānatā ca veditabbā.
施设门的解说巴利
1. Paṇṇattivāravaṇṇanā
10-26 “苦”这个词就是苦。所谓“在其他处”,是指在行苦、变易苦、苦苦这三种苦的立足处。所谓“不观待其他”,是指不观待“行”等其他词。所谓“由此”,是因为执取了不观待其他的“苦”这个词。在那个作为所缘的苦苦上,这个“苦”字就是“苦是苦谛”中的第一个“苦”字,而那也就是苦苦。在“苦是苦谛”这句话里,不应该理解为“唯苦才是苦谛”这样的限定,而应该理解为“苦唯是苦谛”,所以他说“决定唯是苦谛”。在《谛分别》中所说的诸集当中,没有任何一个存在于果法之中——意思是,在《谛分别》中以五种方式所说的诸集里,连一个都不存在于果的自性中,也就是没有果的自性。也有“果法不存在”这样的读法。“道”这个词也用于果的支分:在共通的果支分,比如正见等当中,以“道支”“属于道”等方式出现的“道”这个词,是因为它是道的果,所以通过因的转喻来使用,这是他的意图。因此他说“并非因为具有道的作用”等。“因此”:因为在教导圣谛时,只有具备生起等自性的法,才以集等异门来说,而不是没有生起等自性的法,所以。在这里,三地诸法随其所应,都包含在苦谛和集谛之中,而在指出非谛自性的法及自性法时,只指出了果法。难道与道相应的诸法不也是非谛自性的吗?它们也应该被指出吗?不,因为它们属于道。在“果法”这里,通过“法”这个词,也应该像理解与果相应的诸法一样,理解它们。巴利
10-26.Soti dukkhasaddo. Aññatthāti saṅkhāradukkhavipariṇāmadukkhadukkhādhiṭṭhānesu. Aññanirapekkhoti saṅkhārādipadantarānapekkho. Tenāti aññanirapekkhadukkhapadaggahaṇato. Tasmiṃ dukkhadukkhe visayabhūte. Esa dukkhasaddo ‘‘dukkhaṃ dukkhasacca’’nti ettha paṭhamo dukkhasaddo. Tañca dukkhadukkhaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ dukkhasacca’’nti ettha dukkhameva dukkhasaccanti nayidaṃ avadhāraṇaṃ icchitabbaṃ, dukkhaṃ dukkhasaccamevāti pana icchitabbanti āha ‘‘ekantena dukkhasaccamevā’’ti. Saccavibhaṅge vuttesu samudayesu koci phaladhammesu natthīti saccavibhaṅge pañcadhā vuttesu samudayesu ekopi phalasabhāvesu natthi, phalasabhāvo natthīti attho. ‘‘Phaladhammo natthī’’ti ca pāṭho. Maggasaddo ca phalaṅgesūti sāmaññaphalaṅgesu sammādiṭṭhiādīsu ‘‘maggaṅgaṃ maggapariyāpanna’’ntiādinā (vibha. 492, 495) āgato maggasaddo maggaphalattā pavattati kāraṇūpacārenāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘na maggakiccasabbhāvā’’tiādi. Tasmāti yasmā saccadesanāya pabhavādisabhāvā eva dhammā samudayādipariyāyena vuttā, na appabhavādisabhāvā, tasmā . Ettha ca tebhūmakadhammānaṃ yathārahaṃ dukkhasamudayasaccantogadhattā asaccasabhāve sabhāvadhamme ca uddharanto phaladhamme eva uddhari. Nanu ca maggasampayuttāpi dhammā asaccasabhāvāti tepi uddharitabbāti? Na, tesaṃ maggagatikattā. ‘‘Phaladhammesū’’ti ettha dhammaggahaṇena vā phalasampayuttadhammānaṃ viya tesampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“通过净化词句……在此被把握”:他用这句话指出,非谛自性的诸法已被这部论典排除掉了。“它们”:指的是苦等。“由彼简别而有的殊胜”:是指通过那苦等简别而具有的殊胜性。正因为是作为圣谛的简别,苦等的应遍知等性才得以成立,所以他说“因为是决定真实的”。“正如在此”:正如在这《谛双论》的纯谛分中,只把握了作为圣谛简别的苦等。“在蕴双论等中也是如此”:意思是,并非只在纯谛分中才显示了这一道理。在净化词句分和以彼为根本的轮转分中,因为只说了“色是色蕴”等集合之词,所以并无此理可说,因此他说“在纯蕴等分中”。同样,在此也只是在纯分中显示了这一道理。如果问难说:“如果在纯蕴等分中,只应把握作为蕴等简别的色等,那为何在注释中,也依非蕴等简别的其他色等而显示了义理呢?”对此,他说“然而在注释中……”等。前一种义理才合理;依其合理性,文本本身更具力量。巴利
Padasodhanena…pe… idha gahitāti etena asaccasabhāvānaṃ dhammānaṃ pakaraṇena nivattitataṃ āha. Tesanti dukkhādīnaṃ. Tabbisesanayogavisesanti tena dukkhādivisesanayogena visiṭṭhataṃ. Saccavisesanabhāveneva dukkhādīnaṃ pariññeyyatādibhāvo siddhoti āha ‘‘ekantasaccattā’’ti. Yathā cetthāti yathā etasmiṃ saccayamake suddhasaccavāre saccavisesanabhūtā eva dukkhādayo gahitā. Evaṃ khandhayamakādīsupīti na suddhasaccavāre eva ayaṃ nayo dassitoti attho. Padasodhanavāre taṃmūlacakkavāre ca ‘‘rūpaṃ rūpakkhandho’’tiādinā samudāyapadānaṃyeva vuttattā vattabbameva natthīti ‘‘suddhakkhandhādivāresū’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā cetthāpi suddhavāre eva ayaṃ nayo dassito. Yadi suddhakkhandhādivāresu khandhādivisesanabhūtānameva rūpādīnaṃ gahaṇena bhavitabbaṃ, atha kasmā khandhādivisesanato aññesampi rūpādīnaṃ vasena attho dassitoti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘aṭṭhakathāyaṃ panā’’tiādi. Purimo eva attho yutto, yuttito pāṭhova balavāti.
转起分的解释巴利
2. Pavattivāravaṇṇanā
27-164 27-164. 对于“遍知苦,直到超越苦”这一说法,即使它只是就某个部分而说的,也可能达成那个目的——为了避免有人产生这样的疑惑,论师说:“因为是圣者……才这样说。”不过,有些人在这里提出“因为安住于最后有”作为理由,这并不成立,因为结生时也有对苦的审察,而且并非所有净居天的众生都是最后有者,从“上流”的说法就可以知道。“谁的苦谛生起”——这是指生起的阶段。为了说明:属于苦谛的一切法,以及具有这些法的补特伽罗,都是通过相关联的方式而被说出的,论师说了“一切结生者”等语。由于这个含义已经以决定性的形式被把握,而对于已决定之义,应当通过分别显示来阐明,因此他说:“就在那些……当中……已结生者。”其中,“就在那些当中,有些被看见”是关联。“具有一刹那成就者”——即具有苦刹那成就者。“那些”是指通过决定而把握的那些。“具有道果生起者”——即具有道果生起者,或者这就是该处的读法。巴利
27-164. Dukkhapariññā yāva dukkhasamatikkamanatthāti sappadesaṃ pavattāpi sā tadatthāvahā bhaveyyāti kassaci āsaṅkā siyāti dassento āha ‘‘ariyattā…pe… katvā vutta’’nti. Keci panettha ‘‘antimabhave ṭhitattā’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti, taṃ na yujjati upapattiyā dukkhavicārattā, na ca sabbe suddhāvāsā antimabhavikā uddhaṃsotavacanato. ‘‘Yassa dukkhasaccaṃ uppajjatī’’ti uppādāvatthā. Avisesena dukkhasaccapariyāpannā dhammā sambandhībhāveneva taṃsamaṅgī ca puggalo vuttoti dassento ‘‘sabbe upapajjantā’’tiādiṃ vatvā svāyamattho yasmā nicchayarūpena gahito, nicchitasseva ca atthassa vibhāgadassanena bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā ‘‘tesveva…pe… upapannamevā’’ti āha. Tattha tesveva keci dassīyantīti sambandho. Ekakoṭṭhāsuppattisamaṅginoti dukkhakoṭṭhāsuppattisamaṅgino. Tesūti sanniṭṭhānena gahitesu. Maggaphaluppādasamaṅgīsūti maggaphaluppādasamaṅgīnaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho.
这里用“在此处”等语句,是在显示“一切……”等经文要表达的整体含义。其中,“不混杂着集谛生起的苦谛生起”这个说法,是一个表示不伴随关系的属格。在某些地方,即使是对于不混杂着集谛生起的苦谛,也是从单就苦谛生起、不混杂集谛生起、不伴随集谛生起的角度来显示的,这就是句子的连接方式。不过有些人读作“不混杂集谛的”,对他们来说,应当明白“不伴随那个”是对前一个词的释义。“伴随那个”则是从伴随集谛生起来显示苦谛生起,这就是句子的连接方式。“他们”指的是无想有情,意思是:在转起中,苦谛的生起并没有被“在转起中……”等所说的两个部分所包含。但在结生时,他们的生起已经被第一部分所包含,这一点已经显示出来了。同样地,“灭也是如此”的意思是:就像无想有情在结生时苦谛的生起被第一部分所包含,而在转起时它不被两个部分所包含一样,他们的苦谛之灭也是如此。因为经文在讲灭的部分时,是以“一切死没者……”这样的方式展开的。正是这个道理:凡是通过“在此处”等语句在集谛双论中所述的经文之义理,在道谛双论中也是同样的道理,同样地在那里也应理解其义。因为在那里,经文是以“一切往生者……”这样的方式展开的。巴利
Ettha cātiādinā ‘‘sabbesa’’ntiādipāḷiyā piṇḍatthaṃ dasseti. Tattha samudayasaccuppādavomissassa dukkhasaccuppādassāti idaṃ anādare sāmivacanaṃ. Katthaci samudayasaccuppādavomissepi dukkhasacce taṃrahitassa samudayasaccuppādarahitassa dukkhasaccuppādassa dassanavasena vuttanti yojanā. Keci pana ‘‘samudayasaccāvomissassā’’ti paṭhanti, tesaṃ ‘‘taṃrahitassā’’ti idaṃ purimapadassa atthavivaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Taṃsahitassāti samudayasaccuppādasahitassa dukkhasaccuppādassa dassanavasena vuttanti yojanā. Tesanti asaññasattānaṃ, pavattiyaṃ dukkhasaccassa uppādo ‘‘pavatte’’tiādinā vuttesu dvīsupi koṭṭhāsesu na gahitoti attho. Paṭisandhiyaṃ pana tesaṃ uppādassa paṭhamakoṭṭhāsena gahitatā dassitā eva. Tathā nirodho cāti yathā asaññasattānaṃ paṭisandhiyaṃ dukkhasaccassa uppādo paṭhamakoṭṭhāsena gahito, pavattiyaṃ pana so dvīhi koṭṭhāsehi na gahito, tathā tesaṃ dukkhasaccassa nirodhopīti attho. Tathā hi ‘‘sabbesaṃ cavantānaṃ pavatte taṇhāvippayuttacittassa bhaṅgakkhaṇe’’tiādinā (yama. 1.saccayamaka.88) nirodhavāre pāḷi pavattā. Eseva nayoti yvāyaṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādinā samudayasaccayamake pāḷiyā atthanayo vutto, maggasaccayamakepi eseva nayo, evameva tatthāpi attho netabboti attho. Tathā hi ‘‘sabbesaṃ upapajjantāna’’ntiādinā tattha pāḷi pavattā.
“如此”是指:当以刹那的方式把握处所时,这是以不认可前面所说含义的方式反过来说的。“对此的回答”是指在回答这个双论句时。因为前一部分已经说到“在至上道生起的刹那,在阿罗汉心识生起的刹那,在那个心识之后无间将证得至上道的心识生起的刹那,对于那些投生到无想有情中的有情,他们的苦谛在那里生起,而他们的集谛却不会在那里生起”,所以并没有矛盾,因此说了“在最后一部分……”等话。其中“因此”是说:因为投生心识生起的刹那并不是未来集谛生起的所依,而欲界等处的处所才是所依,所以如此。“因为这属于人处所的章节”:既然这是人处所的章节,所以在“他们,在那里”这句话中,“在那里”一词的含义应当按处所来理解。如果在人处所的章节中,只应按欲界等处所来把握含义,而不是按刹那,那为什么在不提及处所的情况下,就以“一切投生者……”等方式展开回答呢?针对这个责难,他说“在那里……”。其中“在那里”是指在处所的章节中。“为了显示人的差别”是指为了显示被称为人的差别。“他们在哪里”是指在哪个欲界等处的处所中,那些人。巴利
Evañca satīti evaṃ khaṇavasena okāsaggahaṇe satīti yathāvuttamatthaṃ ananujānanavasena paccāmasati. Etassa vissajjaneti etassa yamakapadassa vissajjane. ‘‘Aggamaggassa uppādakkhaṇe, arahantānaṃ cittassa uppādakkhaṇe, yassa cittassa anantarā aggamaggaṃ paṭilabhissanti, tassa cittassa uppādakkhaṇe, asaññasattaṃ upapajjantānaṃ tesaṃ tattha dukkhasaccaṃ uppajjati, no ca tesaṃ tattha samudayasaccaṃ uppajjissatī’’ti (yama. 1.saccayamaka.71) purimakoṭṭhāsassa āgatattā virodho natthīti ‘‘pacchimakoṭṭhāse’’tiādi vuttaṃ . Tattha tasmāti yasmā na upapatticittuppādakkhaṇo bhāvino samudayapaccuppādassa ādhāro, atha kho kāmāvacarādiokāso, tasmā. Puggalokāsavāro hesāti yasmā puggalokāsavāro esa, tasmā ‘‘tesaṃ tatthā’’ti ettha okāsavasena tattha-saddassa attho veditabbo. Yadi puggalokāsavāre kāmāvacarādiokāsavaseneva attho gahetabbo, na khaṇavasena, atha kasmā ‘‘sabbesaṃ upapajjantāna’’ntiādinā okāsaṃ anāmasitvā tattha vissajjanaṃ pavattanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tattha…pe… so evā’’ti. Tattha tatthāti okāsavāre. Puggalavisesadassanatthanti puggalasaṅkhātavisesadassanatthaṃ. Yattha teti yasmiṃ kāmāvacarādiokāse te puggalā.
有人说“某些人”时,是特指法喜长老。因为他解释说:在“在转起中,心识坏灭的刹那,苦谛不生起”这句话里,所指的只是心等起色,因为它跟心识系属而转起。另一些人说:“‘在无色中’这个说法也可以关联前文来看,因此通过区分转起,依无色有的方式来说这个意思,所以在‘或者,对于谁集谛灭去,他的苦谛生起吗?不’等句子里,也应该这样理解。”所谓“补特伽罗不观待心识就被把握”,这是就心识并非主要而言。然而,在确定集谛生起的地方,也必然要确定它不生起,而且离开心识,补特伽罗本身就不可得,所以在“对于谁集谛不生起”这里,作为集谛所依的心识,在意义上已经被把握了,这是可以理解的。再者,即使在系属于根的有情中,也不能说一切色法的生起都绝对依赖于心识的生起,因为可以看到,即使没有心识的生起,那里也有色法生起。因此应当得出结论:只有心等起色在心识生起的刹那生起,其他色法则不是这样,其他色法在它的三个刹那中都生起。有人可能会提出这样的责难:在第一轮中,岂不是有“应分别而未分别”的过失?但在第二轮中,分别本身就是它的内容,所以这个责难不成立。或者说,在第一轮中这个责难也不成立。为什么呢?因为这正是双论的本性,也就是按照所获得的方式来进行搭配。巴利
Kecīti dhammasirittheraṃ sandhāyāha. So hi ‘‘pavatte cittassa bhaṅgakkhaṇe dukkhasaccaṃ nuppajjatī’’ti ettha cittajarūpameva adhippetaṃ cittapaṭibaddhavuttittāti kāraṇaṃ vadati. Apare ‘‘arūpeti imaṃ purimāpekkhampi hotīti tena pavattaṃ visesetvā arūpabhavavasena ayamattho vutto , tasmā ‘yassa vā pana samudayasaccaṃ nirujjhati, tassa dukkhasaccaṃ uppajjatīti? No’tiādīsupi evamattho veditabbo’’ti vadanti. Puggalo na cittaṃ apekkhitvāva gahitoti idaṃ cittassa anadhikatattā vuttaṃ. Yattha pana samudayasaccassa uppādanicchayo, tattheva tassa anuppādanicchayenapi bhavitabbaṃ cittena ca vinā puggalasseva anupalabbhanatoti ‘‘yassa samudayasaccaṃ nuppajjatī’’ti ettha samudayasaccādhāraṃ cittaṃ atthato gahitamevāti sakkā viññātuṃ. Apica indriyabaddhepi na sabbo rūpuppādo ekantena cittuppādādhīnoti sakkā vattuṃ cittuppattiyā vināpi tattha rūpuppattidassanato, tasmā cittajarūpameva cittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppajjati, na itaraṃ, itaraṃ pana tassa tīsupi khaṇesu uppajjatīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Vibhajitabbā avibhattā nāma natthīti siyāyaṃ pasaṅgo paṭhamavāre, dutiyavāre pana vibhajanā eva sāti nāyaṃ pasaṅgo labbhati, paṭhamavārepi vā nāyaṃ pasaṅgo. Kasmā? Esā hi yamakassa pakati, yadidaṃ yathālābhavasena yojanā.
在“当第二心生起时”这一句里,有人说:“第一是有分心,第二是心。”另一些论师说:对存在的贪爱,连同转向心,因为从异熟生起的角度性质不同,所以可以称为“第二”;从那时起,应当说在此之前他的集谛在那里没有生起。不过,这里真正指的是:与对存在的贪爱俱生的第一心,在此处被认定为第二心。在此之前生起的一切心,因为都是无记性、同一种类,所以算作一个;从那时起往下,他的集谛在那里确实没有生起。因此他说“以最终界限”等。tasmiṃ 指在那第二心中。tena samānagatikattā 的意思是:因为与它同类,也就是与所说的第二心及其相应法,在“苦谛已生起,但集谛没有生起”这一应当说的状态上同类。evañca katvā 的意思是:正是因为显示了这种同类性。yathāvuttā 指:第二不善心之前一切心的相应法没有被取入,因为不存在其他状态。为了用另一段经文证明已经说过的道理,所以说“yathā”等。te 指四蕴有。vajjetabbā 的意思是:应当用 itaresa 这个限定语来排除。连接方式就是:就像在五蕴有中,所说的净居天,以第二心刹那相应而说的那种状态,正如被称为净居天的五蕴有先前已经说过那样,四蕴有先前并没有说过。巴利
Dutiye citte vattamāneti ettha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ, dutiyaṃ citta’’nti vadanti. Bhavanikantiyā āvajjanampi vipākappavattito visadisattā ‘‘dutiya’’nti vattuṃ sakkā, tato paṭṭhāya pubbe tassa tattha samudayasaccaṃ nuppajjitthāti vattabbāti apare. Bhavanikantiyā pana sahajātaṃ paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ idha dutiyaṃ cittanti adhippetaṃ. Tato pubbe pavattaṃ sabbaṃ abyākatabhāvena samānajātikattā ekanti katvā tato paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā tassa tattha samudayasaccaṃ nuppajjitthevāti . Tenāha ‘‘sabbantimena paricchedenā’’tiādi. Tasminti dutiye citte. Tena samānagatikattāti tena yathāvuttadutiyacittena ca taṃsamaṅgino vā dukkhasaccaṃ uppajjittha, no ca samudayasaccanti vattabbabhāvena samānagatikattā. Evañca katvāti tena samānagatikatāya dassitattā eva. Yathāvuttāti dutiyākusalacittato purimasabbacittasamaṅgino aggahitā honti itarabhāvābhāvato. Vuttamevatthaṃ pāṭhantarena samatthetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Teti catuvokārā. Vajjetabbāti ‘‘itaresa’’nti visesanena nivattetabbā. Pañcavokārā viya yathāvuttā suddhāvāsāti dutiyacittakkhaṇasamaṅgibhāvena vuttappakārā yathā suddhāvāsasaṅkhātā pañcavokārā pubbe vuttā santi, evaṃ catuvokārā pubbe vuttā na hi santīti yojanā.
对于“Yassa yatthā”这句话,人与处所是依着所依和能依的关系而被看待的,所以说“人与处所是互相区分而被把握的”。在欲界……乃至……已生起者——在这里,在欲界已现观的人,生起于色界;在色界已现观的人,生起于无色界;借着“vā”这个词,也应该这样搭配:在欲界已现观的人,生起于无色界。“Tattha”指已生起的地方。“Abhisamayo”指上道现观;只要它还没有生起,那些已生起的人就不会被收进“已现观者”等所说的第二部分里,因为人与处所是互相区分的。如果是这样,那他们为什么不被包含在这部双论里呢?所以说“te panā”等。在这里,所说的“因同趣故,别说不显”,为了让它更清楚,就说了“未现观者”等。它的意思是——用“未现观者”这第一个词,总括一切在道生起之缘缺、果报生起、也就是净居天中未现观的人;在这两类净居天中,什么时候该把他们取为“未现观者”呢?为了界定他们该被这样取用的时间,所以说“当净居天第二心转起时”。巴利
‘‘Yassa yatthā’’ti puggalokāsā ādheyyādhārabhāvena apekkhitāti āha ‘‘puggalokāsā aññamaññaparicchinnā gahitā’’ti. Kāmāvacare…pe… upapannāti ettha kāmāvacare abhisametāvino rūpāvacaraṃ upapannā, rūpāvacare abhisametāvino arūpāvacaraṃ upapannā, vā-saddena kāmāvacare abhisametāvino arūpāvacaraṃ upapannāti ca yojetabbaṃ. Tatthāti upapannokāse. Abhisamayoti uparimaggābhisamayo yāva upapanno na bhavissati, tāva te tattha upapannapuggalā ettha etasmiṃ ‘‘abhisametāvīna’’ntiādinā vutte dutiyakoṭṭhāse na gayhanti puggalokāsānaṃ aññamaññaṃ paricchinnattā. Yadi evaṃ kiṃ te imasmiṃ yamake asaṅgahitāti āha ‘‘te panā’’tiādi. Tattha yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘samānagatikāti visuṃ na dassitā’’ti, taṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘anabhisametāvīna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – ‘‘anabhisametāvīna’’nti iminā paṭhamapadena gahitā sabbattha magguppattirahe sampattibhave tattha suddhāvāse ye anabhisametāvino, tesu dvippakāresu suddhāvāsā yasmiṃ kāle tattha anabhisametāvinoti gahetabbā, tattha nesaṃ tathā gahetabbakālassa visesanatthaṃ ‘‘suddhāvāsānaṃ dutiye citte vattamāne’’ti vuttanti.
“以此”就是指这句话。所谓“清净心”,是指作为道心的无间缘的心,在这里则是指最高道心。“从彼”是指从上面所说的清净心之前,具有前前心的人,具有随顺智相应心的人,以及具有其余出起观心等的人。因此说:“直到最后与渴爱相应心的人,都已显示出来。”巴利
Etenāti etena vacanena. Vodānacittaṃ nāma maggacittānaṃ anantarapaccayabhūtaṃ cittaṃ, idha pana aggamaggacittassa. Tatoti yathāvuttavodānacittato purimataracittasamaṅgino, anulomañāṇasampayuttacittasamaṅgino, avasiṭṭhavuṭṭhānagāminivipassanācittādisamaṅginopi. Tenāha ‘‘yāva sabbantimataṇhāsampayuttacittasamaṅgī, tāva dassitā’’ti.
结生心和死心的坏灭刹那与生起刹那,与转起心的坏灭刹那、生起刹那,在苦谛等的不生起等方面是同类的,因此说“于转起之心”等语。在这里,应当理解为:死心的生起刹那也被取入。所谓“在两部分中”,是指在集谛的转起和灭的遮止与不遮止方面所说的前分和后分两部分。“没有特别区分”,意思是说:虽然在上述的不遮止中也是如此,但并没有加以区分而说。对于一个具有如此道与果的坏灭刹那的人,因为不区分前分,所以两部分都不生起,这就是其含义。现在为了阐明这个含义,说了“谁的苦谛”等语。某些人。这是限定格。“道与果”则显示所说的道与果,所以说“三果与二道”。然而应当知道,那是指下面的三果和中间的二道。“不间断地令不生起”,意思是不被对立之法所混杂,与观一起令道生起时,应当持续不断地修习,却没有那样做。因此说“间隔地……令生起”。“在无色界道与果的坏灭刹那”,既然没有区分地说,这区别又如何能得到呢?因此说“以通称语”等。由此显示:前缀词以反拨之境的方式而执取,这是世间共许的道理。巴利
Paṭisandhicuticittānaṃ bhaṅguppādakkhaṇā pavatte cittassa bhaṅguppādakkhaṇehi dukkhasaccādīnaṃ nuppādādīsu samānagatikāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘pavatte cittassā’’tiādi. Tattha cuticittassapi uppādakkhaṇassa gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbanti yojanā. Dvīsupi koṭṭhāsesūti samudayasaccassa bhāvino nirodhassa appaṭikkhepapaṭikkhepavasena pavattesu purimapacchimakoṭṭhāsesu. Na visesitanti yathāvutte appaṭikkhepe ca satipi visesetvā na vuttanti attho. Ekassapi puggalassa tādisassa maggassa ca phalassa ca bhaṅgakkhaṇasamaṅgino purimakoṭṭhāsasseva abhajanato koṭṭhāsadvayasambhavābhāvatoti attho. Idāni tamevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘yassa dukkhasacca’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Kesañci puggalānaṃ. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. ‘‘Maggassa ca phalassa cā’’ti vuttamaggaphalāni dassento ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ phalānaṃ dvinnañca maggāna’’nti āha. Tāni pana heṭṭhimāni tīṇi phalāni majjhe ca dve maggā veditabbā. Nirantaraṃ anuppādetvāti paṭipakkhadhammehi avokiṇṇaṃ katvā saha vipassanāya maggaṃ uppādentena yā sātaccakiriyā kātabbā, taṃ akatvāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘antarantarā…pe… uppādetvā’’ti. ‘‘Arūpe maggassa ca phalassa ca bhaṅgakkhaṇe’’ti avisesato vutte kathamayaṃ viseso labbhatīti āha ‘‘sāmaññavacanenapī’’tiādi. Tena apavādavisayapariyāyena upasaggā abhinivisantīti lokasiddhoyaṃ ñāyoti dasseti.
第3分 遍知分释巴利
3. Pariññāvāravaṇṇanā
165-170 这里“在此”就是指在这个谛双论当中。“为了显示不可遍知等”这句话里,“a”这个前缀并不是在说“不存在可遍知”,也不是在说“遍知”的反面,而是在说“另外的东西”。在诸谛当中,凡是依道理可以安立的“应当断”等等,在“见”的部分确实已经涉及到了,而这一节本来是以“见”为主的;为了说明那些不以“见”为主的部分,对于某些谛中虽然也存在某些特相,但这一节并不以“见”为主,所以就说“作证……乃至……以及为了见”。在集谛中说“断遍知”,而不说“度遍知”,这本身是合理的,因为集谛也有应当被度遍的自性。既然如此,为什么又说“在苦谛中说度遍知,而不说断遍知”呢?苦难道不是确实不可断的吗?因为在集谛分别中所说的某些集的部分,已经被归入苦谛当中,所以应当理解为:这是就不混杂苦与集而取来说的如实之谈。“在两者中”是指在苦和集两者中所说的。为什么?因为这是它们共同具有的。这样一来,为了显示由共同与不共同之差别所区分的遍知作用,虽然在前分阶段可以在不同刹那中获得,但到了道的阶段,却只在一个刹那中获得,因为它是同一智的作用,所以说“道智”等等。巴利
165-170.Etthevāti imasmiṃ saccayamake eva. Apariññeyyatādassanatthanti ettha a-kāro na pariññeyyābhāvavacano, nāpi pariññeyyapaṭipakkhavacano, atha kho tadaññavacanoti yathārahaṃ saccesu labbhamānānaṃ pahātabbatādīnampi dassane āpanneyeva samayavāro dassanaparo, yesañca na dassanaparo, tesu kesuci saccesu labbhamānānampi kesañci visesānaṃ ayaṃ vāro na dassanaparoti dassento ‘‘sacchikaraṇa…pe… dassanatthañcā’’ti āha. Samudaye pahānapariññāva vuttā, na tīraṇapariññāti yuttaṃ tāvetaṃ samudayassapi tīretabbasabhāvattā, ‘‘dukkhe tīraṇapariññāvavuttā, na pahānapariññā’’ti idaṃ pana kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu dukkhaṃ appahātabbamevāti? Samudayasaccavibhaṅge vuttānaṃ kesañci samudayakoṭṭhāsānaṃ dukkhasacce saṅgahaṇato dukkhasamudaye vā asaṅkaratova gahetvā bhūtakathanametaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ubhayatthāti dukkhe samudaye ca vuttā. Kasmā? Tesaṃ sādhāraṇāti. Evaṃ sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇabhedabhinnaṃ yathāvuttaṃ pariññākiccaṃ pubbabhāge nānakkhaṇe labbhamānampi maggakāle ekakkhaṇe eva labbhati ekañāṇakiccattāti dassetuṃ ‘‘maggañāṇañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
6. 行双论巴利
6. Saṅkhārayamakaṃ
施设分别的注释巴利
1. Paṇṇattivāravaṇṇanā
1 虽然善根等已经被分别说明,但蕴等的分类相比之下更为殊胜,为了显示这一点,所以说“像前面的诸蕴一样,未分别”。或者,这里“等”字是种类的意思,就像“存在等”中的用法一样,应当知道善根等也被包含在内。因为未被了知,所以请谛听。或者,此处因义由省略而指示,意为“未被使知”。虽然在对身行的两种抉择中,也只取因果之义,但为了显示以属格语形所显现者实有义别,所以说“于身……乃至……作主义”。那个就是作主义。巴利
1. Satipi kusalamūlādīnampi vibhattabhāve khandhādivibhāgo tato sātisayoti dassento ‘‘khandhādayo viya pubbe avibhattā’’ti āha. Pakārattho vā ettha ādi-saddo ‘‘bhūvādayo’’tiādīsu viyāti kusalamūlādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Aviññātattā nisāmentehi. Hetuattho vā ettha luttaniddiṭṭho aviññāpitattāti attho. Yadipi kāyasaṅkhārānaṃ vikappadvayepi hetuphalabhāvoyeva icchito, sāmivacanarūpāvibhūto pana attheva atthabhedoti dassento ‘‘kāyassa…pe… kattuatthe’’ti āha. So panāti kattuattho.
2-7 以“单独一词各自不混杂”来说,是指在“身行”等每一组两个词中,以彼此不混杂的单独一词来表达。“由于意义不存在”,是因为所意图的意义并不存在。否则,像业所生身之类的意义其实是存在的。因此他说“词句净化……不可说”。现在,为了通过反例来显示这个意义不存在,他说了“如同”等。可是,既然两处同样是复合词,为什么在那里意义能得到,在这里却得不到呢?因为特征不同。在那里,色蕴等词是同位格,所以能得到一个以两个词为依托的意义;而在这里,身行等词是异位格,所以那样的意义得不到。因此他说“由于所意图的意义不存在”。巴利
2-7.Suddhikaekekapadavasenāti ‘‘kāyo saṅkhāro’’tiādīsu dvīsu dvīsu padesu aññamaññaṃ asammissaekekapadavasena. Atthābhāvatoti yathādhippetatthābhāvato. Aññathā karajakāyādiko attho attheva. Tenevāha ‘‘padasodhana…pe… avacanīyattā’’ti. Idāni tameva atthābhāvaṃ byatirekavasena dassento ‘‘yathā’’tiādimāha. Kasmā pana ubhayattha samāne samāsapadabhāve tattha attho labbhati, idha na labbhatīti? Bhinnalakkhaṇattā. Tattha hi rūpakkhandhādipadāni samānādhikaraṇānīti padadvayādhiṭṭhāno eko attho labbhati, idha pana kāyasaṅkhārādipadāni bhinnādhikaraṇānīti tathārūpo attho na labbhatīti. Tenāha ‘‘yathādhippetatthābhāvato’’ti.
不分别阐明各自的意思时,即使“身行”等词是一起说出来的,“身行”这个词也没有分别说明它自己的含义,而是假定它表达一个整体的意思——这是以假设的方式在说。由此暗示了“身行”等词之间是同位格的关系。为什么说“身行这个词是在身行的意义上使用的”,而不是说“行这个词只是在行的意义上使用的”呢?因为如果那样说的话,就像“蕴”这个词在蕴的意义上使用时,需要“色”这个词和“身”这个词来限定,这句话才说得通;然而,为了表明在“身行”等词的同位格关系中,不只是“行”这个词在行的意义上使用,“身”这个词也同样如此,所以才说“身行这个词是在身行的意义上使用的”,意思就是与“身”这个词构成同位格。而如果是异位格的话,“行”确实具有需要被限定的性质。巴利
Visuṃ adīpetvāti ‘‘kāyasaṅkhāro’’tiādinā saha vuccamānopi kāyasaṅkhārasaddo visuṃ visuṃ attano atthaṃ ajotetvā ekaṃ atthaṃ yadi dīpetīti parikappavasena vadati. Tena kāyasaṅkhārasaddānaṃ samānādhikaraṇataṃ ulliṅgeti. ‘‘Kāyasaṅkhārasaddo kāyasaṅkhāratthe vattamāno’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, ‘‘saṅkhārasaddo saṅkhārattheva vattamāno’’ti pana vattabbaṃ siyā. Evañhi sati khandhatthe vattamāno khandhasaddo viya rūpasaddena kāyasaddena visesitabboti idaṃ vacanaṃ yujjeyya, kāyasaṅkhārasaddānaṃ pana samānādhikaraṇatte na kevalaṃ saṅkhārasaddoyeva saṅkhāratthe vattati, atha kho kāyasaddopīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kāyasaṅkhārasaddo kāyasaṅkhāratthe vattamāno’’ti vuttaṃ siyā, kāyasaddena samānādhikaraṇenāti adhippāyo. Byadhikaraṇena pana saṅkhārassa visesitabbatā atthevāti.
“这个轮”是指纯粹行的轮。如果只说“由词句净化所显示的那些”,那么因为显示的状态有共通性,就会把纯身等词也包含进去。为了防止这一点,所以说“只是那些所意图的”。因为没有被身等词所包含,就是没有被纯身等词所包含。而“在这里”是指在注疏中。虽然是对纯行之轮而说,但这里并不认可纯行之轮,而是说它属于整个行双论的范围,因此说“而在这里,在行双论中”。“所意图意义的舍弃”是指不取入出息等所意图的意义,而取思、身、造作、行等非所意图的意义。如果因为“身是行”等以纯行为根本的轮转在义理上不成立,所以在这里不应取用,那么为什么不从转起轮开始,却开始了不同的开示呢?所以说“以词句净化轮为根本的轮转等”。疑惑的产生,是因为“行”这个词的可说性有共通性,以及身行等词具有不同位格的关系。因此说“由非同位格……所显示的”。巴利
Imassa vārassāti suddhasaṅkhāravārassa. Padasodhanena dassitānanti ettakeva vuccamāne tattha dassitabhāvasāmaññena suddhakāyādīnampi gahaṇaṃ āpajjeyyāti taṃnivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘yathādhippetānamevā’’ti āha. Kāyādipadehi aggahitattāti suddhakāyādipadehi aggahitattā. Idha panāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Suddhasaṅkhāravāraṃ sandhāya vuttampi suddhasaṅkhāravāramevettha ananujānanto sakalasaṅkhārayamakavisayanti āha ‘‘idha pana saṅkhārayamake’’ti. Adhippetatthapariccāgoti assāsapassāsādikassa adhippetatthassa aggahaṇaṃ cetanākāyaabhisaṅkharaṇasaṅkhārādi anadhippetatthapariggaho. Yadi ‘‘kāyo saṅkhāro’’tiādinā suddhasaṅkhārataṃmūlacakkavārā atthābhāvato idha na gahetabbā, atha kasmā pavattivārameva anārabhitvā aññathā desanā āraddhāti āha ‘‘padasodhanavārataṃmūlacakkavārehī’’tiādi. Saṃsayo hoti saṅkhārasaddavacanīyatāsāmaññato kāyasaṅkhārādipadānaṃ byadhikaraṇabhāvato ca. Tenevāha ‘‘asamānādhikaraṇehi…pe… dassitāyā’’ti.
生起部分的解释巴利
2. Pavattivāravaṇṇanā
19 诸行和人的处所性,应当理解为:由于相应法的依止缘关系,以及诸行应当被入定所成就,所以人具有禅那的处所性;而地界,则就人作为处所的程度而言,诸行也同样以同等程度成为处所。以“在第二禅、在第三禅”等说法表示禅那,以“在欲界、在色界”等说法分别表示地界,它们被各自作为处所来执取。“如是”是原因的意思,意思是:因为禅那也被作为处所来执取,所以如此。在人的部分中,以处所的方式执取人,就是说:当人、处所、诸行等被以处所的性质来执取时,那时是依那两种处所来执取的——那个人所在之处,以及在那个人身上所获得的禅那,以这两种称为地与禅那的处所,随应地对身行等进行执取和说明。因此,正因为如此,所以如此。以第二禅、第三禅作为处所,就是以称为第二禅、第三禅的处所方式来执取。怎样呢?如“在没有寻和伺的入出息生起的那一刹那”,这样被执取的人就被区分开来显示。以什么?应当连接:正是以那没有寻和伺的入出息生起的那一刹那。巴利
19.Saṅkhārānaṃpuggalānañca okāsattāti sampayuttānaṃ nissayapaccayatāya, saṅkhārānaṃ samāpajjitabbatāya puggalānaṃ jhānassa okāsatā veditabbā, bhūmi pana yadaggena puggalānaṃ okāso, tadaggena saṅkhārānampi okāso. ‘‘Dutiye jhāne tatiye jhāne’’tiādinā jhānaṃ, ‘‘kāmāvacare rūpāvacare’’tiādinā bhūmi ca visuṃ okāsabhāvena gahitā. Itīti hetuattho, yasmā jhānampi okāsabhāvena gahitaṃ, tasmāti attho. Puggalavāre ca okāsavasena puggalaggahaṇeti puggalavāre ca yadā puggalokāsasaṅkhārādīnaṃ okāsabhāvena gayhati, tadā tesaṃ dvinnaṃ okāsānaṃ vasena gayhanaṃ hotīti yattha so puggalo, yañca tasmiṃ puggale jhānaṃ upalabbhati, tesaṃ dvinnaṃ bhūmijhānasaṅkhātānaṃ okāsānaṃ vasena yathārahaṃ kāyasaṅkhārādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ kathanaṃ hotīti. Tasmāti yasmā etadeva, tasmā. Dutiyatatiyajjhānokāsavasenāti dutiyatatiyajjhānasaṅkhātaokāsavasena gahitā. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Vinā vitakkavicārehi assāsapassāsānaṃ uppādakkhaṇe’’ti evaṃ gahitā puggalā visesetvā dassitā. Kena? Teneva vitakkavicārarahitaassāsapassāsuppādakkhaṇenāti yojetabbaṃ.
在第一部分,是以禅那的处所来显示人,所以说“再次……显示”。以地的处所来显示人,这就是它们之间的关联。“两种”是指按禅那和地的处所差别而分成的两种。“他们”是指那些人。“初禅已成就的欲界者”,这是通用于应排除和应包含的说法,而限定它的是“在入出息生起的刹那”,所以说“以区别……刹那”。就是靠这个区别。“欲界者”中的“pi”字是总括的意思。因此,不只是色界、无色界中成就初禅的人,还包括欲界的人,这就把前面说的意思总括起来了。是什么样的欲界者呢?他说“胎内者等”。用“等”字包含了沉入水中的人和昏迷的人,但不包括死者、成就第四禅的人和入灭尽定的人。因为他们就像非欲界者一样,由于寻伺的生起,和色界、无色界的有情一样被排除了。这是决定性的,也就是入出息不存在的决定性。“被显示”是说色界、无色界者以举例的方式被提到,并不是说没有他们就完全没有别的,这是意图所在。初禅的处所与入出息的缺失相结合,这就是连接。在这里,第一是取初禅具足者中的色界、无色界者,第二是取前面所说的胎内者等。以这种方法——也就是通过禅那处所和地处所来区分人的方法——以此方法、此途径。在一切处、一切问题中。巴利
Paṭhamakoṭṭhāse jhānokāsavasena puggaladassanaṃ katanti vuttaṃ ‘‘puna…pe… dassetī’’ti. Bhūmiokāsavasena puggalaṃ dassetīti sambandho. Dvippakārānanti jhānabhūmiokāsabhedena duvidhānaṃ. Tesanti puggalānaṃ. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpannānaṃ kāmāvacarāna’’nti ca idaṃ nivattetabbagahetabbasādhāraṇavacanaṃ, tassa ca avacchedakaṃ ‘‘assāsapassāsānaṃ uppādakkhaṇe’’ti idanti vuttaṃ ‘‘visesa…pe… khaṇe’’ti. Tena visesanena. Kāmāvacarānampīti pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tena na kevalaṃ rūpārūpāvacaresu paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpannānaṃ, atha kho kāmāvacarānampīti vuttamevatthaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Kīdisānaṃ kāmāvacarānanti āha ‘‘gabbhagatādīna’’nti. Ādi-saddena udakanimuggavisaññibhūtā saṅgahitā, na matacatutthajjhānasamāpannanirodhasamāpannā. Te hi akāmāvacaratāya viya rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgino vitakkavicāruppattiyāva nivattitā. Ekantikattāti assāsapassāsābhāvassa ekantikattā. Nidassitāti rūpārūpāvacarā nidassanabhāvena vuttā, na tabbirahitānaṃ aññesaṃ abhāvatoti adhippāyo. Paṭhamajjhānokāsā assāsapassāsavirahavisiṭṭhāti yojanā. Paṭhamañcettha paṭhamajjhānasamaṅgīnaṃ rūpārūpāvacarānaṃ gahaṇaṃ, dutiyaṃ yathāvuttagabbhagatādīnaṃ. Iminā nayenāti yvāyaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ puggalānañcā’’tiādinā jhānokāsabhūmiokāsavasena puggalavibhāganayo vutto, iminā nayena upāyena. Sabbattha sabbapucchāsu.
21 在这个含义上,如果执取“依转生处所来区分禅那”这个说法,那么在其他地方也应该依转生处所来区分禅那,这样一来就会产生不想要的后果。为了说明这一点,就说了“在第四禅”等话。那么,那个不想要的后果是什么呢?回答说:“因为会导致地的空间自性本身没有被把握的过失。”因为无论在哪里执取禅那,那里就应该依转生处所来区分它。如果这样的话,被把握的就只是禅那的空间,而不是地的空间,因为地的空间是附属性质的。再者,在“在第四禅、色界、无色界”这句话里,当依色界和无色界之地来区分第四禅时,被把握的就只是其中一部分第四禅依空间而被把握,而不是全部的第四禅。因此说:“也因为会导致一切第四禅没有依空间被把握的过失。”所谓“禅那空间与地空间”,就是指禅那的空间和地的空间。巴利
21.Etasmiṃ pana atthe satīti yvāyaṃ uppattibhūmiyā jhānaṃ visesetvā attho vutto, etasmiṃ atthe gayhamāne aññatthapi uppattibhūmiyā jhānaṃ visesitabbaṃ bhaveyya, tathā ca aniṭṭhaṃ āpajjatīti dassento ‘‘catutthajjhāne’’tiādimāha. Kiṃ pana taṃ aniṭṭhanti āha ‘‘bhūmīnaṃokāsabhāvasseva aggahitatāpattito’’ti. Yattha yattha hi jhānaṃ gayhati, tattha tattha taṃ uppattibhūmiyā visesitabbaṃ hoti. Tathā sati jhānokāsova gahito siyā, na bhūmiokāso guṇabhūtattā. Kiñca ‘‘catutthajjhāne rūpāvacare arūpāvacare’’ti ettha rūpārūpabhūmiyā catutthajjhāne visesiyamāne tadekadesova okāsavasena gahito siyā, na sabbaṃ catutthajjhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbacatutthajjhānassa okāsavasena aggahitatāpattito cā’’ti. Jhānabhūmokāsānanti jhānokāsabhūmiokāsānaṃ.
既然有人提出责难:如果在禅那领域空间不混杂地对应的情况下,并不是在一切初禅的空间里都有身行和语行,同样也不是在一切欲界的空间里都有,那么为了回应这个责难,就说了“即使……”等话。其中“于彼处”指的是初禅的空间和欲界的空间。“彼二者的生起”指的是身行和语行这两者的生起。如果以不混杂的方式执取这两种空间,就能得到这个功德,所以说“分别……不应说”。其中“依唯支分”是指依寻等禅支的部分。那里应当说的,注释书里已经说过了。即使没有寻,伺仍然是语行,所以说“无寻……而行”。所谓“顶端之第二禅”,指的是四法系统里的第二禅。因为此禅通过完全断除扰动之法而舍断了寻支,具有殊胜性,所以可以称为“顶端”。所谓“如无想有情”,应当看作是不相似的譬喻。巴利
Nanu ca jhānabhūmiokāse asaṅkarato yojiyamāne na sabbasmiṃ paṭhamajjhānokāse kāyasaṅkhāro vacīsaṅkhāro ca atthi, tathā sabbasmiṃ kāmāvacarokāseti codanuppattiṃ sandhāya tassa parihāraṃ vattuṃ ‘‘yadipī’’tiādimāha. Tatthāti paṭhamajjhānokāse kāmāvacarokāse ca. Taṃdvayuppattīti tassa kāyavacīsaṅkhāradvayassa uppatti. Okāsadvayassa asaṅkarato gahaṇe ayañca guṇo laddho hotīti āha ‘‘visuṃ…pe… na vattabbaṃ hotī’’ti. Tattha aṅgamattavasenāti vitakkādijhānaṅgamattavasena. Tattha vattabbaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttameva. Vitakkarahitopi vicāro vacīsaṅkhāroyevāti āha ‘‘avitakka…pe… gacchatī’’ti. Muddhabhūtaṃ dutiyajjhānanti catukkanaye dutiyajjhānamāha. Tañhi sakalakkhobhakaradhammavigamena vitakkekaṅgappahāyikato sātisayattā ‘‘muddhabhūta’’nti vattabbataṃ labhati. Asaññasattā viyāti idaṃ visadisudāharaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
37 在“转向”之前生起的一切心,因为与结生心属于同一趣向,所以被合在一起说成“最初”。因此说“无寻无伺”等。为了显示心行的起始,也就是为了显示净居天中(该)心行的起始。同样地,“为了显示语行的起始”在这里也是如此。巴利
37. Āvajjanato pubbe pavattaṃ sabbaṃ cittaṃ paṭisandhicittena samānagatikattā ekaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭhamato’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘avitakkaavicārato’’tiādi. Cittasaṅkhārassa ādidassanatthanti suddhāvāse cittasaṅkhārassa ādidassanatthaṃ. Tathā ‘‘vacīsaṅkhārassa ādidassanattha’’nti etthāpi.
7. 随眠双论巴利
7. Anusayayamakaṃ
界定与所界定论题的节注释巴利
Paricchedaparicchinnuddesavāravaṇṇanā
1 “由无明生起,色就生起;由渴爱生起,色就生起;由业生起,色就生起。贪是诸业生起的因。”像这样,通过这类说法已经说明了善根、不善根等作为缘的状态,所以说“以显示缘的根双论”。又通过“他如实了知‘色是无常的,色是无常的。眼是无常的,诸色是无常的’”等说法,以蕴等多种角度安立了无常随观等,所以说“因为在蕴等中审察众多”。由于断除烦恼之后,再没有别的断除作用,所以说“以断随眠为终点的断遍知”。虽然断遍知并不是通过和随眠相应、或以随眠为所缘而生起的,但一旦没有随眠,那种执取本身就不存在了,因此说“为了阐明由随眠而来的断遍知”。“以随眠性而可得者”,就是指以随眠性而存在者,也就是具有随眠自性者。“以三种方式”,就是通过界定等三种方式。如果随眠没有从数目、自性、生起处等方面被说明,那么依人、处所等而生起、以那些随眠为对象的开示就不容易理解。为了说明这一点,所以说“在它们那样……因为难以理解”。巴利
1. ‘‘Avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo, taṇhāsamudayā rūpasamudayo, kammasamudayā rūpasamudayo. Lobho nidānaṃ kammānaṃ samudayāyā’’ti ca evamādinā kusalamūlakusalādīnaṃ paccayabhāvo vuttoti āha ‘‘paccayadīpakena mūlayamakenā’’ti. ‘‘So ‘aniccaṃ rūpaṃ, aniccaṃ rūpa’nti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Cakkhu aniccaṃ, rūpā aniccā’’ti ca ādinā bahulakhandhādimukhena aniccānupassanādayo vihitāti vuttaṃ ‘‘khandhādīsu tīraṇabāhullato’’ti. Kilesānaṃ samucchindanato paraṃ pahānakiccaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘anusayapahānantā pahānapariññā’’ti. Yadipi anusayehi sampayogato ārammaṇato vā pahānapariññā nappavattati, anusayābhāve pana tadārambho eva natthīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘anusayehi pahānapariññaṃ vibhāvetu’’nti. Anusayabhāvena labbhamānānanti anusayabhāvena vijjamānānaṃ, anusayasabhāvānanti attho. Tīhākārehīti paricchedādīhi tīhi pakārehi. Anusayesu gaṇanasarūpappavattiṭṭhānato abodhitesu puggalokāsādivasena pavattiyamānā tabbisayā desanā na suviññeyyā hotīti dassento āha ‘‘tesu tathā…pe… duravabodhattā’’ti.
这里“于前”这个说法,是指紧接在前的规则,或者是对它的否定,因此是就“有随眠品”等来说的,不是就“随眠品”等来说的,因为在随眠品里,圣典的安立早就已经完成了。为了说明这一点,所以说“在这些有随眠品等当中,‘于前’就是这个意思”。因为在有随眠品等前三品里,教法是按照“从何处、于何处”这种方式展开的,不是在随眠品等里面。由于没有意义上的差别,也就是“从欲界死去”这类圣典中出现的语句,和“或者往生欲界”这类以双论方式出现在注释书等当中的语句,两者在意义上没有差别。意思是:这怎么能成为双论的教说呢?因为缺少第二句。如果这不是双论教说,那为什么出现在这里?所以说“因为在前面品中”等等。其中,“显示随眠处的界定”,就是显示作为随眠处的界定。即便如此,这《随眠双论》怎么能具有双论教说呢?所以说“双论教说……应当看作名称”。依义理,就是依逆序的义理。因为把第一句所说的反转过来,也能成为双论教说,比如“色即色蕴,色蕴即色”等,但那里有意义差别,这里没有,所以没有那样教说。为了说明这一点,所以说“但由于没有意义差别,所以没有说”。依可得性,就是依提问的可得性。巴利
Ettha purimesūti paduddhāro anantarassa vidhi paṭisedho vāti katvā sānusayavārādiapekkho, na anusayavārādiapekkho anusayavāre pāḷivavatthānassa pageva katattāti dassento ‘‘etesu sānusayavārādīsu purimesūti attho’’ti āha. Sānusayavārādīsu hi tīsu purimesu okāsavāre yato tatoti desanā pavattā, na anusayavārādīsu. Atthavisesābhāvatoti ‘‘kāmadhātuyā cutassā’’tiādinā (yama. 2.anusayayamaka.302) pāḷiāgatapadassa, ‘‘kāmadhātuṃ vā pana upapajjantassā’’tiādinā yamakabhāvena aṭṭhakathāādigatapadassa ca atthavisesābhāvato. Kathamayaṃ yamakadesanā siyā dutiyassa padassa abhāvatoti attho. Yadi nāyaṃ yamakadesanā, atha kasmā idhāgatāti āha ‘‘purimavāre hī’’tiādi. Tattha anusayaṭṭhānaparicchedadassananti anusayaṭṭhānatāya paricchedadassanaṃ. Evampi kathamidaṃ anusayayamakaṃ yamakadesanāsabbhāvatoti āha ‘‘yamakadesanā…pe… nāmaṃ daṭṭhabba’’nti . Atthavasenāti paṭilomatthavasena. Paṭhamapadena hi vuttassa viparivattanavasenapi yamakadesanā hoti ‘‘rūpaṃ rūpakkhandho, rūpakkhandho rūpa’’ntiādīsu (yama. 1.khandhayamaka.2), tattha pana atthaviseso atthi, idha natthi, tasmā na tathā desanā katāti dassento āha ‘‘atthavisesābhāvato pana na vuttā’’ti. Labbhamānatāvasenāti pucchāya labbhamānatāvasena.
“显示它们应当生起”:通过这句话,以直接的方式显示出随眠是未来的,因为它们是被道所断的;而已经生起的过去和现在的事物,不被称为“应当生起”,因为它们已经生起了。然而,诸法以什么样的自性被称为“未来的随眠”,它们就以同样的自性被称为过去和现在的事物。因为诸法的自性并不会因为时间的不同而有所不同,所以随眠的过去和现在状态,是以间接的方式获得的,因此注释书(《双论注·随眠双论》)中说“也是过去的”等等。如此种类,就是指随眠的种类,意思是:一旦获得因缘,就能够生起。这个“如此种类”在生起的部分被“生起”这个词所涵盖,用意是显示它应当生起的无间断状态。因此说“不像在蕴双论等中那样是正在生起的状态”,意思就是现在性。用“因此”等话,使前面所说的含义更加清楚。其中,“无差别”就是没有区别。正因为应当生起和随眠没有差别,所以《分别论》(分别论203)中说:“这渴爱生起时即生起,在此止住时即止住”。这里的意思是说,随眠就是止住。巴利
Uppattiarahataṃ dassetīti iminā nippariyāyena anusayā anāgatāti dassitaṃ hoti yato te maggavajjhā, na ca atītapaccuppannā uppattirahāti vuccanti uppannattā. Yaṃsabhāvā pana dhammā anāgatā anusayāti vuccanti, taṃsabhāvā eva te atītapaccuppannā vuttā. Na hi dhammānaṃ addhābhedena sabhāvabhedo atthi, tasmā anusayānaṃ atītapaccuppannabhāvā pariyāyato labbhantīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (yama. aṭṭha. anusayayamaka 1) ‘‘atītopi hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃpakārāti anusayappakārā, kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjanārahāicceva attho. So evaṃpakāro uppajjanavāre uppajjati-saddena gahito uppajjanārahatāya avicchinnabhāvadīpanatthanti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘na khandhayamakādīsu viya uppajjamānatā’’ti, paccuppannatāti attho. Tenevātiādinā yathāvuttamatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ karoti. Tattha ninnānākaraṇoti nibbiseso. Uppajjanānusayānaṃ ninnānākaraṇattā eva hi ‘‘etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisatī’’ti vibhaṅge (vibha. 203) āgataṃ. Anusayanañhi ettha nivisananti adhippetaṃ.
现在,为了说明过去和现在的事物在哪种意义上可以被称为有随眠,并且把未来的也跟它们放在一起说明,所以说了“然而,适当的因缘……被称为”这段话。由此表明:应当依据过去已经存在的趋向,来理解过去和现在事物中那种“可能生起”的状态。所谓“可能生起”,应当理解为烦恼还没有被圣道彻底断除。而这种状态在过去和现在的事物上也同样存在,因此又以另一种方式说明,它们只是在间接的意义上被称为有随眠。所以说了“然而,对于圣道……”等。所谓“如此种类的”,指的是那些若不修习圣道便会生起的烦恼。而法确实生起,并非法之形态,这是其意趣。因为并非说法之形态——无常性等——会生起。然而,如果它们具有生起等,那就只是法。因此说“未断除的形态也生起,这样说并不合理”。巴利
Idāni yena pariyāyena atītapaccuppannesu anusayavohāro, taṃ dassetukāmo anāgatampi tehi saddhiṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā dassento ‘‘anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ pana…pe… vuccantī’’ti āha. Etena bhūtapubbagatiyā atītapaccuppannesu uppattirahatā veditabbāti dasseti. Uppattiarahatā nāma kilesānaṃ maggena asamucchinnatāya veditabbā. Sā ca atītapaccuppannesupi atthevāti pakārantarenapi tesaṃ pariyāyatova anusayabhāvaṃ pakāseti. Tenevāha ‘‘maggassa panā’’tiādi. Tādisānanti ye maggabhāvanāya asati uppattirahā, tādisānaṃ. Dhammo eva ca uppajjati, na dhammākāroti adhippāyo. Na hi dhammākārā aniccatādayo uppajjantīti vuccanti. Yadi pana te uppādādisamaṅgino siyuṃ, dhammā eva siyuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘appahīnākāro ca uppajjatīti vattuṃ na yujjatī’’ti.
世尊也曾说过:诘难者如果不考虑“有力状态”,只抓住“未被断除的状态”这一点来发难,就会说“若说众生随眠……则成过失”。为了说明这一点,论主说:“若说‘众生随眠……则成过失’”。因为一旦把“有力状态”考虑进来,诘难就没有立足的余地了。所以论主说“不成过失”等话。这个道理不只存在于义注中,根本正文里也已经有了这样的读法,因此应当这样来理解。为了说明这一点,论主先说了“有力者……是合理的”,接着为了打消“什么是有力状态”这个疑问,又说“所谓有力者……已说”。其中“不与其余诸法共通的”意思是:就像烦恼的所依等,其烦恼的自性在欲贪等之外是找不到的,那正是它们独有的自性,正因如此,它们才被称为“有的种子”“有的根本”。又因为“有力状态”正是它们不与其余诸法共通的独特自性,所以为了说明“因此名为随眠”,论主说:“‘有力者’就是具有随眠者的意思。”巴利
Vuttampi thāmagamanaṃ aggahetvā appahīnaṭṭhamattameva gahetvā codako codetīti dassento āha ‘‘sattānusaya…pe… āpajjatīti ce’’ti. Na hi thāmagamane gahite codanāya okāso atthi. Tenāha ‘‘nāpajjatī’’tiādi. Vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ, na kevalamaṭṭhakathāyameva pāṭhagatovāyamattho, tasmā evameva gahetabboti dassento ‘‘thāmagato…pe… yutta’’nti vatvā kiṃ pana taṃ thāmagamananti parāsaṅkaṃ nivattento ‘‘thāmagatanti ca…pe… vuttā’’ti āha. Tattha aññehi asādhāraṇoti kilesavatthuādīnaṃ kilesatādisabhāvo viya kāmarāgādito aññattha alabbhamāno tesaṃyeva āveṇiko sabhāvo, yato te bhavabījaṃ bhavamūlanti ca vuccanti. Yasmā ca thāmagamanaṃ tesaṃ anaññasādhāraṇo sabhāvo, tasmā anusayananti vuttaṃ hotīti dassento ‘‘thāmagatoti anusayasamaṅgīti attho’’ti āha.
在随眠分里已经说过的这个意思,在生起分里也同样说了,也就是用“凡是有欲贪随眠生起的人,就有嗔恚随眠生起吗?是的”这类句式来表达。所以,随眠的形态本身,在生起分里就已经被“生起”这个词涵盖进去了。因此有人说“生起分和随眠分被分别解说得没有差别”,针对这一点,他开始考察,用“因为随眠分和生起分有相同的走向”等话展开。
如果有人说“生起”这个说法,在生起分里,“生起”这个说法可能是在显示那些还没有被断除的形态。若真是如此,那么就像在“此法的生起”这里,也能知道“此法的未灭”这个意思;同样,说“生起”时,从意义上也就等于说了“不生起”,因为未被断除的形态具有不应生起的性质。为了显示这个责难,他说“不能说‘生起’这个说法没有说过吗”。由于从词义的特殊性来说,这两者已经被说过了,以此说明:即使法没有差异,由于词义的差异,也有不同分段的教说,就像在俱生、相应分等中那样。接着以“获得适合的原因”等话开始,正是为了阐明那个词义的特殊性。“适于生起”即适合生起,意思是具有生起的同类性。因此,随眠被称为“应生起者”,这一点应当完全接受,因为从“凡是有欲贪随眠生起的人,就有嗔恚随眠生起吗?是的”这类说法来看。若只说“随眠即随眠”,就会得出这样的意思:那些始终存在的随眠,是否因为尚未完成的随眠状态而被称为“随眠”呢?为了否定这一点,说了“获得适合的原因而生起”。以应生起的性质而住立,这就是随眠的状态;对于他们所说的“生起适合”这一说法,那确实是正确说的,为了说明这个意思,说了“随眠一词”等话。以此显示:两种分段的教说所生起的,是对随眠一词含义的确定。那也确实说得好,因为有这经教的证据;这也是以“在阿毗达摩中首先”等话所说的三种,只是针对经教而说的,为了说明这一点,他说“因为以三种经教也显示了心相应性”。巴利
‘‘Yassa kāmarāgānusayo anuseti, tassa paṭighānusayo anusetīti? Āmantā’’tiādinā (yama. 2.anusayayamaka.3) anusayavāre vutto eva attho ‘‘yassa kāmarāgānusayo uppajjati, tassa paṭighānusayo uppajjatīti? Āmantā’’tiādinā (yama. 2.anusayayamaka.300) vuttoti anusayanākāro eva uppajjanavāre uppajjati-saddena gahitoti ‘‘uppajjanavāro anusayavārena ninnānākaraṇo vibhatto’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, tattha vicāraṃ ārabhati ‘‘anusayauppajjanavārānaṃ samānagatikattā’’tiādinā. ‘‘Uppajjatī’’ti vacanaṃ siyāti uppajjanavāre ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vacanaṃ appahīnākāradīpakaṃ siyā. Tathā ca sati yathā ‘‘imassa uppādā’’ti ettha imassa anirodhāti ayamatthopi ñāyati, evaṃ ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vutte atthato ‘‘na uppajjatī’’ti ayamattho vutto hoti appahīnākārassa uppattirahabhāvassa anuppajjamānasabhāvattāti codanaṃ dassento ‘‘uppajjatīti vacanassa avuttatā na sakkā vattunti ce’’ti āha. Vacanatthavisesena taṃdvayassa vuttattāti etena dhammanānattābhāvepi padatthanānatthena vārantaradesanā hoti yathā sahajātasaṃsaṭṭhavāresūti dasseti. Anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvātiādi tameva vacanatthavisesaṃ vibhāvetuṃ āraddhaṃ. Uppattiyogganti uppattiyā yoggaṃ, uppajjanasabhāgatanti attho. Yato anusayā uppattirahāti vuccanti, ekantena cetadeva sampaṭicchitabbaṃ ‘‘yassa kāmarāgānusayo uppajjati, tassa paṭighānusayo uppajjatīti? Āmantā’’tiādivacanato (yama. 2.anusayayamaka.300). ‘‘Anusentīti anusayā’’ti ettake vutte sadā vijjamānā nu kho te aparinipphannānusayanaṭṭhena ‘‘anusayā’’ti vuccantīti ayamattho āpajjatīti taṃnisedhanatthaṃ ‘‘anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppattiarahabhāvena thāmagatatā anusayaṭṭhoti yaṃ tesaṃ uppattiyogavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ sammadeva vuttanti imamatthamāha ‘‘anusayasaddassā’’tiādinā. Tena vāradvayadesanuppādikā anusayasaddatthaniddhāraṇāti dasseti. Tampi suvuttameva iminā tantippamāṇenāti idampi ‘‘abhidhamme tāvā’’tiādinā āgataṃ tividhameva tantiṃ sandhāyāhāti dassento āha ‘‘tantittayenapi hi cittasampayuttatā dīpitā hotī’’ti.
生起处段的注释巴利
Uppattiṭṭhānavāravaṇṇanā
2 当“这样说”时,是指受有需要简别的状态、欲界也有需要简别的状态。欲界没有被说成随眠的所依处,因为它不是主要的;在主要和次要之中,要显示的是主要者的作用;而且应当依简别的状态来行持——这就是意趣所在。或许有人会想:“那有什么过失呢?”为了消除这个疑虑,他说“然而,在两种之中……”等。“在两种之中”是简别中的处格,“在三界之中”这里也一样。因此,因为随眠的所依处按界等分为三种,其中色界和无色界被说成有贪随眠的所依处,所以欲贪随眠在欲界的所依处就一定应当被说,因此。“在三界之中、在三种受之中”是简别中的处格,而“在欲界的两种受之中”则是依处格。巴利
2.Evaṃ satīti vedanānaṃ visesitabbabhāve kāmadhātuyā ca visesanabhāve sati. Kāmādhātuyā anusayanaṭṭhānatā na vuttā hoti appadhānabhāvato, padhānāppadhānesu padhāne kiccadassanato, visesanabhāvena caritabbatāya cāti adhippāyo. Hotu ko dosoti kadāci vadeyyāti āsaṅkamāno āha ‘‘dvīsu panā’’tiādi. Dvīsūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ, tathā ‘‘tīsu dhātūsū’’ti etthāpi. Tasmāti yasmā dhātuādibhedena tividhaṃ anusayaṭṭhānaṃ, tattha ca rūpārūpadhātūnaṃ bhavarāgassa anusayaṭṭhānatā vuttāti kāmadhātuyā kāmarāgassa anusayaṭṭhānatā ekantena vattabbā, tasmā. Tīsu dhātūsu tīsu vedanāsūti ca niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ, kāmadhātuyā dvīsu vedanāsūti ca ādhāre.
“只在两种之中”是指在乐受和舍受这两种之中。“在所有的两种之中”是指在任何两种之中。“由此”是指通过“欲贪潜在两种受中”这句话的语力所得出的、依区别而作的决定。有贪潜在的地方是色界和无色界,以及与之相应的受。因为这里并不是要确定“欲贪只潜在两种受中”,而是要确定“只在两种受中”。所以他说:“只在两种之中潜在,不在三种之中。”再者,随眠没有落脚处,那是什么?是不属于有身的一切出世间法。用“又”字把嗔恚随眠的落脚处也收了进来。因此说了“又如……”等。“其他”是指作为欲贪随眠落脚处的两种受。巴利
Dvīsvevāti dvīsu sukhopekkhāsu eva. Sabbāsu dvīsūti yāsu kāsuci dvīsu. Tenāti ‘‘kāmarāgo dvīsu vedanāsu anusetī’’ti vacanasāmatthiyaladdhena visesanicchayeneva. Bhavarāgānusayaṭṭhānaṃ rūpārūpadhātuyo tadanurūpā ca vedanā. Na hi dvīsu vedanāsu kāmarāgānusayova anusetīti avadhāraṇaṃ icchitaṃ, dvīsu eva pana vedanāsūti icchitaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘dvīsveva anuseti, na tīsū’’ti. Aṭṭhānañca anusayānaṃ, kiṃ taṃ apariyāpannaṃ sakkāye? Sabbo lokuttaro dhammo. Ca-saddena paṭighānusayaṭṭhānaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi. Aññāti kāmarāgānusayaṭṭhānabhūtā dve vedanā.
在与另外两种受不相应的法中。所谓“可爱相、可乐相”,是指那些本性可爱、甘美、值得贪恋的事物。这也是对色等法所作的一种限定说明,因为在一切根门、一切人当中,可意的状态并不固定。所谓“以对可乐之乐与寂静之乐的贪求”,是指以贪着、渴望可乐之乐与寂静之乐的方式。其中,可乐之乐是身体的乐,寂静之乐是心里的乐。或者,可乐之乐是身体上的乐,寂静之乐是舍乐。正如所说:“然而舍因为寂静,就被说成是乐。”或者,下劣、粗显的乐是可乐之乐,不粗显的是寂静之乐。这里说“下劣”,是因为指的是欲贪随眠。“在其他处”,是指在受之外的其他地方。“它”,是指欲贪随眠。“随行于受之后而卧”,是指仅仅以受为所缘而活动,就像乳母以孩子为所缘而照顾他那样;而被称为“卧”的活动,其实就是欲贪的渴爱本身。因此说:“唯希求乐。”就像欲贪这样,嗔恚随眠等也按照所说的规则,在苦受等当中各自执行自己的作用,应当理解为随眠。因此说:“如是嗔恚随眠也……”等。“以于三受中随眠的说法”,是指以于三受中如其所应随眠的说法。“于以可意等状态而被执取的事物中”,是指:对于依所缘本性而成为可意等、并被执取为可意等的事物,以及由于颠倒想的力量,在不可意等事物中被执取为可意等的事物——这样连接。因为以可意等状态来执取,并不是颠倒想。巴利
Aññesu dvīhi vedanāhi vippayuttesu. Piyarūpasātarūpesūti piyāyitabbamadhurasabhāvesu. Visesanañcetaṃ rūpādīnaṃ sabbadvārasabbapurisesu iṭṭhabhāvassa aniyatatāya kataṃ. Sātasantasukhagiddhiyāti sātasukhe santasukhe ca gijjhanākārena abhikaṅkhanākārena. Tattha sātasukhaṃ kāyikaṃ, santasukhaṃ cetasikaṃ. Sātasukhaṃ vā kāyikasukhaṃ, santasukhaṃ upekkhāsukhaṃ. Tathā cāhu ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti (visuddhi. 2.644; mahāni. aṭṭha. 27). Parittaṃ vā oḷārikaṃ sukhaṃ sātasukhaṃ, anoḷārikaṃ santasukhaṃ. Parittaggahaṇañcettha kāmarāgānusayassa adhippetattā. Aññatthāti vedanāhi aññattha. Soti kāmarāgānusayo. Vedanāsu anugato hutvā setīti vedanāpekkho eva hutvā pavattati yathā puttāpekkhāya dhātiyā anuggaṇhanappavatti, sayanasaṅkhātā pavatti ca kāmarāgassa nikāmanameva. Tenāha ‘‘sukhamicceva abhilapatī’’ti. Yathā tassa, evaṃ paṭighānusayādīnampi vuttaniyāmena yathāsakaṃ kiccakaraṇameva dukkhavedanādīsu anusayanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ paṭighānusayo cā’’tiādi. Tīsu vedanāsu anusayanavacanenāti tīsu vedanāsu yathārahaṃ anusayanavacanena. Iṭṭhādibhāvena gahitesūti iṭṭhādīsu ārammaṇapakatiyā vasena iṭṭhādibhāvena gahitesu viparītasaññāya vasena aniṭṭhādīsu iṭṭhādibhāvena gahitesūti yojanā. Na hi iṭṭhādibhāvena gahaṇaṃ viparītasaññā.
这里,“在那里”是指对可意所缘等而言。“在此处”是指就随眠来说。“作为欲贪味著等之基础的欲有等”,应当理解为:对作为欲贪味著、有之味著之基础的欲有、色有、无色有的执取——这是句义上的连接。“在那里”是指在三受、三界当中,这里的处格是表示简别。“苦的违逆”就是在苦中的不喜乐。“无论在哪里”,是指在苦受中,或在与其相应的不可意色等当中,无论何处。“广大”指已执取的蕴,即色有和无色有;未执取的蕴,即色界法和无色界法。“在那里”是指在如上所说的广大诸法中,应当知道唯是“有贪”。因此说:“在色界、无色界中,这里的欲贪随眠不随眠。”“见随眠等”——通过“等”这个字,应当知道还含摄了疑随眠、无明随眠等。巴利
Tatthāti iṭṭhārammaṇādīsu. Etthāti anusayane. Kāmassādādivatthubhūtānaṃ kāmabhavādīnanti kāmassādabhavassādavatthubhūtānaṃ kāmarūpārūpabhavānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbanti yojanā. Tatthāti vedanāttayadhātuttayesu. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Dukkhapaṭighāto dukkhe anabhirati. Yattha tatthāti dukkhavedanāya taṃsampayuttesu aniṭṭharūpādīsu vāti yattha tattha. Mahaggatā upādinnakkhandhā rūpārūpabhavā, anupādinnakkhandhā rūpārūpāvacaradhammā. Tatthāti yathāvuttesu mahaggatadhammesu bhavarāgoicceva veditabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpadhātuyā arūpadhātuyā ettha kāmarāgānusayo nānusetī’’ti. Diṭṭhānusayādīnanti ādi-saddena vicikicchānusayaavijjānusayādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
离三界、离三受而解脱的状态,并不是诸见随眠等的随眠处,这一点已经说得很清楚了。因为在问诸见随眠等的生起处时,回答就是“于一切有身所摄诸法中”。然而,为了说明欲贪随眠不随眠的地方,确实存在一个离苦受、离色界无色界而解脱的诸见随眠等的随眠处,所以接下来发起“难道不是……”等讨论。其中,“从彼随眠处”,是指从那个欲贪随眠的随眠处。“其他”,是指被称为出离所依的喜与舍。这里的简要含义是:就像嗔恚随眠不出现在出离所依的忧中一样,欲贪随眠也不出现在出离所依的喜与舍中。因此可以说“欲贪随眠不随眠之处,见随眠也不随眠”,所以把它剔除掉,没有宣说。“存在”,是先承认那些受的存在,然后为了说明剔除不说的理由,而说“然而……彼未说”。“彼随眠处”,是指那些见随眠等的随眠处。“因此”,意思是:虽然在欲贪随眠处之外,还有见随眠等的随眠处,但在离三界、离三受而解脱的状态中,因为只剩两种受,所以那种随眠处并不存在。那两种受没有被宣说,也没有被单独剔除,就是这个意思。“因此”,还因为“欲贪等不随眠之处,见与疑也不随眠”这个义理,已经通过“是的”这个回答无差别地解答了,所以“欲贪等随眠之处,见与疑也随眠”这个义理,同样可以无差别地成立。以无差别的方式宣说,苦就被显示为嗔恚的随眠处。因此说“以无差别……应知”。其中,“以无差别”,是指不区分在家所依和出离所依。“以整体方式执取”,是指按前面所说的各部分整体来执取,即只是苦。“以无差别、以整体方式执取”这个意思,用“如此”一词带出,在“于两种受中”这里也是如此,因为不想要对在家所依等作区分。巴利
Dhātuttayavedanāttayavinimuttaṃ diṭṭhānusayādīnaṃ anusayanaṭṭhānaṃ na vuttanti suvuttametaṃ diṭṭhānusayādīnaṃ uppattiṭṭhānapucchāyaṃ ‘‘sabbasakkāyapariyāpannesu dhammesu’’icceva vissajjitattā. Kāmarāgo pana yattha nānuseti, taṃ dukkhavedanārūpārūpadhātuvinimuttaṃ diṭṭhānusayādīnaṃ anusayanaṭṭhānaṃ atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha tadanusayanaṭṭhānatoti tassa kāmarāgānusayassa anusayanaṭṭhānato. Aññā nekkhammassitasomanassupekkhāsaṅkhātā. Ayamettha saṅkhepattho – nekkhammassitadomanasse viya paṭighānusayo nekkhammassitasomanassupekkhāsu kāmarāgānusayo nānusetīti ‘‘yattha kāmarāgānusayo nānuseti, tattha diṭṭhānusayo nānusetī’’ti sakkā vattunti tasmā taṃ uddharitvā na vuttanti. Hontūti tāsaṃ vedanānaṃ atthitaṃ paṭijānitvā uddharitvā avacanassa kāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘na pana…pe… taṃ na vutta’’nti. Tadanusayanaṭṭhānanti tesaṃ diṭṭhānusayādīnaṃ anusayanaṭṭhānaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā satipi kāmarāgānusayanaṭṭhānato aññasmiṃ diṭṭhānusayādīnaṃ anusayanaṭṭhāne taṃ pana dhātuttayavedanāttayavinimuttaṃ natthi vedanādvayabhāvato, tasmā. Taṃ vedanādvayaṃ na vuttaṃ visuṃ na uddhaṭanti attho. Tasmāti yasmā ‘‘yattha kāmarāgādayo nānusenti, tattha diṭṭhivicikicchā nānusentī’’ti ayamattho ‘‘āmantā’’ti iminā paṭivacanavissajjanena avibhāgato vuttoti ‘‘yattha kāmarāgādayo anusenti, tattha diṭṭhivicikicchā anusentī’’ti ayampi attho avibhāgatova labbhati, tasmā. Avibhāgato ca dukkhaṃ paṭighassa anusayanaṭṭhānanti dīpitaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘avisesena…pe… veditabba’’nti. Tattha avisesenāti gehassitaṃ nekkhammassitanti visesaṃ akatvā. Samudāyavasenagahetvāti yathāvuttaavayavānaṃ samūhavasena dukkhantveva gahetvā. ‘‘Avisesena samudāyavasena gahetvā’’ti imamatthaṃ tathā-saddena anukaḍḍhati ‘‘dvīsu vedanāsū’’ti etthāpi gehassitādivibhāgassa anicchitattā.
如果这样,那么“他以此舍断嗔恚,嗔恚随眠不在那里潜在”这句经文又该怎么解说呢?针对这个责难,所以说了“再者……”等话。那里的“那里”,是指那忧,或指与那忧相应的嗔恚。用“出离所依的忧”等话,是在显示这部经需要引申解释,不是了义经。然而,像所引的经文那样,为什么在这里没有说呢?所以说“因为是嗔恚生起的不适合处”等等。即使这样,经文与阿毗达摩论又怎么会互相违背呢?所以说“这是无余说,而那是有余说”。“这样做了”,意思正是因为是有余说。“贪随眠”,指的是欲贪随眠。因为说到“指以不来道断除”,所以广大法并不是它潜在的地方,因此没有提及初禅,而说“因为世间……不可说……不潜在”。“由于非所依”,是因为在自性上根本不是生起之处。“在此”,是指在《随眠双论》中。“依所说方法”,是指依“生起出离所依的忧之后……”等所说的方法。“由于彼对立的存有”,是因为那些嗔恚等的对立道确实存在。为了显示不仅因为道存在,也因为强有力的观智存在,所以说“由于彼断除……的存有……”。巴利
Yadi evaṃ ‘‘paṭighaṃ tena pajahati, na tattha paṭighānusayo anusetī’’ti idaṃ suttapadaṃ kathanti codanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ domanasse, taṃsampayutte vā paṭighe. Nekkhammassitaṃ domanassantiādinā neyyatthamidaṃ suttaṃ, na nītatthanti dasseti. Yathā pana suttaṃ udāhaṭaṃ, tathā idha kasmā na vuttanti āha ‘‘paṭighuppattirahaṭṭhānatāyā’’tiādi. Evampi suttābhidhammapāṭhānaṃ kathamavirodhoti āha nippariyāyadesanā hesā, sā pana pariyāyadesanāti. Evañca katvāti pariyāyadesanattā eva. Rāgānusayoti kāmarāgānusayo adhippeto. Yato ‘‘anāgāmimaggena samugghātanaṃ sandhāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā tassa na mahaggatadhammā anusayanaṭṭhānanti taṃ paṭhamajjhānañca anāmasitvā ‘‘na hi lokiyā…pe… nānusetīti sakkā vattu’’nti vuttaṃ. Avatthubhāvatoti sabhāveneva anuppattiṭṭhānattā. Idhāti imasmiṃ anusayayamake. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘nekkhammassitaṃ domanassaṃ uppādetvā’’tiādinā vuttena nayena . Taṃpaṭipakkhabhāvatoti tesaṃ paṭighādīnaṃ paṭipakkhassa maggassa sabbhāvato. Na kevalaṃ maggasabbhāvato, atha kho balavavipassanāsabbhāvatopīti dassento āha ‘‘taṃsamugghā…pe… bhāvato cā’’ti.
现在,对于各处所说的“随眠处”,或者按所应执取的法来说,或者按执取方式的差别来说,有两种理解。其中,针对第一种理解,说“当所缘上有随眠处时”。如果把色等所缘当作诸随眠的随眠处,那么针对这里所说的“不可说”是为了显示什么含义,就说了“因为对苦……”等话。“如果有”是指如果有欲贪随眠。“对这个也”是说,对于与见随眠相应的贪,也应当说“在一切有身所摄的诸法中”是欲贪的处所,但经文并没有这样说。“然而……”等话是针对第二种理解说的。“因意乐而倾向彼”是说,即使没有把它当作所缘,凡是欲贪等因意乐而倾向的地方,那就是它们的随眠处。因此说“随逐而眠”。“然而说”是连接语。“如……”等话是用举例来阐明所说的含义。意思是,嗔恚只是以在苦上受打击的方式生起,并不是以把它当作所缘的方式生起。苦本身被说成它的随眠处,意思是:因为意乐倾向于那里,所以苦本身被说成嗔恚的随眠处,而不是所缘的色等和乐受,这就是要表达的意思。“如是”是说,正如对其他所缘的嗔恚,也因为意乐倾向于苦而只说苦是随眠处一样。“于苦等……被说”是指,通过“应以苦证得乐。没有布施”等身体苦行,以及对布施功德等的邪执而生起的、与见随眠相应的贪,即使有其他所缘,也以“这样将会快乐”的意乐,只以贪著快乐的方式生起,所以在巴利文中,只有乐和舍这两种,被说成这个贪的随眠处,而不是像前面所说的苦等,因此和有贪等并不相违。“在同一个……”等话,是为了进一步说明第二种理解。其中,贪有乐的意乐,应当根据具有这种意乐的人来理解,或者像眼有不等同的意乐那样,以倾向彼的方式理解。其余各项也应这样理解。它们——贪和嗔——在同一个所缘上,也有不同的随眠处,这就是意思。巴利
Idāni yadetaṃ tattha tattha ‘‘anusayanaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ gahetabbadhammavasena vā siyā gahaṇavisesena vāti dve vikappā, tesu paṭhamaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ārammaṇe anusayanaṭṭhāne satī’’ti. Rūpādiārammaṇe anusayānaṃ anusayanaṭṭhānanti gayhamāne yamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘na sakkā vattu’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dukkhāya hī’’tiādimāha. Yadi siyāti yadi kāmarāgānusayo siyā. Etassapīti diṭṭhānusayasampayuttalobhassapi ‘‘sabbasakkāyapariyāpannesu dhammesū’’ti kāmarāgassa ṭhānaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, na ca vuttaṃ. Atha panātiādi dutiyavikappaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ajjhāsayavasena taṃninnatāyāti asatipi ārammaṇakaraṇe yattha kāmarāgādayo ajjhāsayato ninnā, taṃ tesaṃ anusayanaṭṭhānaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anugato hutvā setī’’ti. Atha pana vuttanti sambandho. Yathātiādi yathāvuttassa atthassa udāharaṇavasena nirūpanaṃ. Dukkhe paṭihaññanavaseneva pavattati, nārammaṇakaraṇavasenāti adhippāyo. Dukkhameva tassa anusayanaṭṭhānaṃ vuttanti ajjhāsayassa tattha ninnattā dukkhameva tassa paṭighassa anusayanaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ, nālambitaṃ rūpādi sukhavedanā cāti adhippāyo. Evanti yathā aññārammaṇassapi paṭighassa ajjhāsayato dukkhaninnatāya dukkhameva anusayanaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ. Dukkhādīsu…pe… vuttanti ‘‘dukkhena sukhaṃ adhigantabbaṃ. Natthi dinna’’nti ca ādinā kāyakilamanadukkhe dānānubhāvādike ca micchābhinivesanavasena uppajjamānena diṭṭhānusayena sampayutto aññārammaṇopi lobho ‘‘evaṃ sukhaṃ bhavissatī’’ti ajjhāsayato sukhābhisaṅgavaseneva pavattatīti sukhupekkhābhedaṃ sātasantasukhadvayameva assa lobhassa anusayanaṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ, na yathāvuttaṃ dukkhādi, tasmā bhavarāga…pe… na virujjhati. Ekasmiṃyeva cātiādi dutiyavikappaṃyeva upabrūhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha rāgassa sukhajjhāsayatā taṃsamaṅgino puggalassa vasena veditabbā, tanninnabhāvena vā cakkhussa visamajjhāsayatā viya. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tesaṃ rāgapaṭighānaṃ nānānusayaṭṭhānatā hoti ekasmimpi ārammaṇeti attho.
像这样做了之后,即使所执取之法的差别不存在,也仅仅因为执取方式的特殊,随眠处就已经不同了。如果说“在哪里……不”,否则就会相违。因为如果按所执取之法的差别来区分贪和嗔的随眠处,那就可能只安立在异熟上,这是不合理的,而且也不是所有人的根门都固定为可意或不可意。虽然按照前面所说的贪的方式,欲贪随眠性可以成立,但是,就像在乐受、舍受以及可意所缘中生起的、与忧俱行的嗔,因为力量弱而不成为嗔恚随眠一样,这里所说的贪也不成为欲贪随眠——为了说明这个道理,所以说了“然而在注释书中”等话。“非嗔恚随眠”这里,“非”字是遮止的意思,不是别的意思;为了说明在其他情况下根本不可能存在,所以说了“然而这个”等话。其中,通过“因为并没有忧受会成为嗔恚随眠这种疑虑”,以显示“非”字没有别的含义,从而成立它表示无有的意思。巴利
Evañca katvāti asatipi gahetabbabhede gahaṇavisesena anusayanaṭṭhānassa bhinnattā eva. ‘‘Yattha…pe… no’’ti vuttaṃ, aññathā virujjheyya. Gahetabbabhedena hi rāgapaṭighānaṃ anusayanaṭṭhānabhede gayhamāne vipākamatte ṭhātabbaṃ siyā, na ca taṃ yuttaṃ, napi sabbesaṃ purisadvārānaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ niyatanti. Yadipi yathāvuttalobhassa vuttanayena kāmarāgānusayatā sambhavati, yathā pana sukhupekkhāsu iṭṭhārammaṇe ca uppajjantena domanassena saha pavatto doso dubbalabhāvena paṭighānusayo na hoti, evaṃ yathāvuttalobhopi kāmarāgānusayo na hotīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhakathāyaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na paṭighānusayoti ettha na-kāro paṭisedhanattho, na aññattho, itarattha pana sambhavo eva natthīti dassento ‘‘yaṃ paneta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘na hi domanassassa paṭighānusayabhāvāsaṅkā atthī’’ti iminā na-kārassa aññatthatābhāvadassanamukhena abhāvatthataṃ samattheti.
如果“开示混杂”会变成那样,那么在这里,为了显示开示的混杂,就说了“有贪也……可能……”。它的意思是:就像欲贪在欲界的两种受中,以所缘的方式生起,被说成“欲贪在欲界的两种受中潜在”,同样,如果有人说“有贪在欲界的两种受中潜在”,那么有贪也……可能……。这样一来,有贪和欲贪的开示就会混杂,而且还得显示有贪与欲贪的差别。而这个差别不能通过俱生随眠来显示,所以必须通过所缘的方式来显示。因此说“所以所缘……意趣”。其中,“以所缘的差别”是指以色界、无色界为所缘的差别。“为了显示差别”是指为了显示有贪与欲贪的差别。开示就是这样作的:把处所放在“在色界、无色界,这里有贪随眠潜在”这样的语境中来说。因此说“因为没有俱生受的差别”。巴利
Desanāsaṃkiṇṇā viya bhaveyyāti ettha desanāsaṅkaraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhavarāgassapi…pe… bhaveyyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassattho – yathā kāmarāgassa kāmadhātuyā dvīsu vedanāsu ārammaṇakaraṇavasena uppatti vuttā ‘‘kāmarāgo kāmadhātuyā dvīsu vedanāsu anusetī’’ti, evaṃ yadi ‘‘bhavarāgo kāmadhātuyā dvīsu vedanāsu anusetī’’ti vucceyya, bhavarāgassapi…pe… bhaveyya. Tato ca kāmarāgena saddhiṃ bhavarāgassa desanā saṃkiṇṇā bhaveyya, kāmarāgato ca bhavarāgassa viseso dassetabbo. So ca sahajātānusayavasena na sakkā dassetunti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena dassetabbo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmā ārammaṇa…pe… adhippāyo’’ti. Tattha ārammaṇavisesenāti rūpārūpadhātusaṅkhātaārammaṇavisesena. Visesadassanatthanti kāmarāgato bhavarāgassa visesadassanatthaṃ. Evaṃ desanā katāti ‘‘rūpadhātuyā arūpadhātuyā ettha bhavarāgānusayo anusetī’’ti evaṃ visaye bhummaṃ katvā desanā katā. Tenāha ‘‘sahajātavedanāvisesābhāvato’’ti.
1. 随眠节的解说巴利
1. Anusayavāravaṇṇanā
3 以不断生起的方式来说:是指随眠生起没有中断的方式,意思就是没有间断。可是,在善心和无记心的刹那中,随眠怎么会生起呢?所以说“唯以道……之前”。巴利
3.Pavattāvirāmavasenāti anusayappavattiyā avirāmavasena, avicchedavasenāti attho. Kathaṃ pana kusalābyākatacittakkhaṇe anusayānaṃ pavattīti āha ‘‘maggeneva…pe… pubbe’’ti.
20 20. 心和心所的“处所”就是指心的生起,所以说“在一个心生起中”。“那些各种人”是指凡夫等人。“本性”是指自性。因为依其自性,苦受本来就是欲贪不随眠的地方。其余各项也应同样按适当的方式来说明。因为后面将会说:“依本性,苦等是欲贪等不随眠之处,这是就此而说的。”“以断除”是指以断除每一种随眠。“三种人”是指凡夫、入流者、一来者。“两种人”是指不来者和阿罗汉。“此处”是指在这个关于人的处所的部分中。“前解答法”是指“三种人”等前面回答的方法中。“处所”是指生起之处,但这里应理解为苦受。“后解答法”是指“两种人”等回答的方法中。非处所性即不随眠性。巴利
20. Cittacetasikānañca ṭhānaṃ nāma cittuppādoti āha ‘‘ekasmiṃ cittuppāde’’ti. Tesaṃ tesaṃ puggalānanti puthujjanādīnaṃ puggalānaṃ. Pakatiyā sabhāvena. Sabhāvasiddhā hi dukkhāya vedanāya kāmarāgassa ananusayanaṭṭhānatā. Evaṃ sesesupi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Vakkhati hi ‘‘pakatiyā dukkhādīnaṃ kāmarāgādīnaṃ ananusayanaṭṭhānataṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti. Pahānenāti tassa tassa anusayassa samucchindanena. Tiṇṇaṃ puggalānanti puthujjanasotāpannasakadāgāmīnaṃ. Dvinnaṃ puggalānanti anāgāmiarahantānaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ puggalokāsavāre. Purimanayeti ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ puggalāna’’ntiādike purimasmiṃ vissajjananaye. Okāsanti uppattiṭṭhānaṃ, idha pana dukkhavedanā veditabbā. Pacchimanayeti ‘‘dvinnaṃ puggalāna’’ntiādike vissajjananaye. Anokāsatā ananusayanaṭṭhānatā.
2. 有随眠品的注释巴利
2. Sānusayavāravaṇṇanā
66-131 “有随眠、舍断、遍知”这是就人而说的。在“以欲贪而有随眠、舍断欲贪、遍知欲贪”这类表述中,是依于具有随眠的状态,以及依于舍断和遍知作用中的作者身份,才说为人,而不是说法。或者依有的差别,即仅仅依有的差别。其余,即在嗔随眠等当中。或者依有随眠的差别,即依欲有等有之差别所限定的随眠差别。有随眠性、无随眠性等,这里“等”字包含舍断、未舍断、遍知、未遍知。难道在有的差别中,某些随眠不是未舍断的吗?那不是随眠所造,而是因为因缘欠缺、没有生起的处所,所以并不矛盾。在两种受中,即在乐受和舍受中,应与苦受一起,以欲贪随眠而说为无随眠。这也没有,因为是就人而说的。因此说“因为人……随眠”。虽然人有随眠的处所和无处所,但为了显示那是他有随眠性等的因,所以说“然而随眠……”等。无随眠性等,这里“等”字包含未舍断、未遍知。遍知就是超越,在遍知的部分中也说“从格、离格之说”。巴利
66-131.‘‘Sānusayo, pajahati, parijānātī’’ti puggalo vuttoti ‘‘kāmarāgena sānusayo, kāmarāgaṃ pajahati, kāmarāgaṃ parijānātī’’tiādīsu anusayasamaṅgibhāvena pahānapariññākiriyāya kattubhāvena ca puggalo vutto, na dhammo. Bhavavisesena vāti kevalena bhavavisesena vā. Itaresūti paṭighānusayādīsu. Bhavānusayavisesena vāti kāmabhavādibhavavisiṭṭhānusayavisesena vā. Sānusayatāniranusayatādikāti ettha ādi-saddena pahānāpahānapariññāpariññā saṅgayhanti. Nanu ca bhavavisese kesañci anusayānaṃ appahānanti? Na taṃ anusayakataṃ, atha kho paccayavekallato anokāsatāya cāti nāyaṃ virodho. Dvīsu vedanāsūti sukhaupekkhāsu vedanāsu dukkhāya vedanāya kāmarāgānusayena niranusayoti yojetabbaṃ. Idampi natthi puggalavasena vuccamānattā. Tenāha ‘‘na hi puggalassa…pe… anusayāna’’nti. Yadipi puggalassa anusayanokāso anokāso, tassa pana sānusayatādihetu hotīti dassento ‘‘anusayassa panā’’tiādimāha. Niranusayatādīnanti ādi-saddena appahānāpariññā saṅgaṇhāti. Parijānanaṃ samatikkamananti pariññāvārepi ‘‘apādāne nissakkavacana’’nti vuttaṃ.
从“随眠处”这一说法,指的是随眠处的因。在“从不随眠处”这一说法里,也是同样的道理。为了显示相状和从格的状态:在有随眠那一部分,是为了显示相状的状态;在舍断和遍知那两部分,则是为了显示从格的状态,应当这样结合起来理解。在“舍断”这里,应当引出经文“从色界、无色界,舍断那里的慢随眠”,然后结合起来理解;而在“不舍断”这里,则是“对苦受,不舍断那里的欲贪随眠”。在“如此等等”中,“等”这个字也把遍知那一部分包括进来了。只是用依格来说明,就是以因的意思来说明的,这就是它的意思。巴利
Anusayanaṭṭhānatoti anusayanaṭṭhānahetu. ‘‘Ananusayanaṭṭhānato’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Nimittāpādānabhāvadassanatthanti sānusayavāre nimittabhāvadassanatthaṃ, pajahanapariññāvāresu apādānabhāvadassanatthañcāti yojetabbaṃ. Pajahatīti ettha ‘‘rūpadhātuyā arūpadhātuyā tato mānānusayaṃ pajahatī’’ti pāḷipadaṃ āharitvā yojetabbaṃ, na pajahatīti ettha pana ‘‘dukkhāya vedanāya tato kāmarāgānusayaṃ nappajahatī’’ti. Evamādīsūti ādi-saddena pariññāvārampi saṅgaṇhāti. Bhummaniddeseneva hetuattheneva niddiṭṭhāti attho.
以第四个问题的解答,也就是对“凡是以慢随眠而有随眠的人,在此处就是以欲贪随眠而有随眠”这个问题的解答。因为在那个解答里,通过“色界、无色界”等说法,如实指出了随眠生起之处。“其意义是”意思是:指出那个随眠处所就是它的意义,所以叫“其意义”,也就是在那个意义上。“为了显示随眠生起之处而开始了这一段”等说法,是通过“凡”这个字说明了随眠生起之处,把这一点阐明之后,看起来像是写错了:本来该用“已生起”这个词,却用了“未生起”。然而,就像在“生起分”里,用“生起”这个词来说明有生起可能性的法一样,这里说“未生起”也没有任何矛盾。而且,接下来要说的“因为非所摄法没有随眠生起的可能”,这也不是过失。因为凡是随眠有生起可能的地方,就把它们合在一起说“在一切处”。看起来正是如此,意思就是这看起来像是写错了。巴利
Catutthapañhavissajjanenāti ‘‘yato vā pana mānānusayena sānusayo, tato kāmarāgānusayena sānusayo’’ti etassa pañhassa vissajjanena. Tattha hi ‘‘rūpadhātuyā arūpadhātuyā’’tiādinā sarūpato anusayanaṭṭhānāni dassitāni. Tadattheti taṃ anusayanaṭṭhānadassanaṃ attho etassāti tadattho, tasmiṃ tadatthe. ‘‘Anusayassa uppattiṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ ayaṃ vāro āraddho’’tiādinā ‘‘yato’’ti etena anusayanaṭṭhānaṃ vuttanti imamatthaṃ vibhāvetvā. Pamādalikhitaṃ viya dissati uppanna-saddena vattamānuppanne vuccamāne. Yathā pana uppajjanavāre uppajjati-saddena uppattiyogadīpakattā uppattirahā vuccanti, evamidhāpi uppattiarahe vuccamāne na koci virodho. Yaṃ pana vakkhati ‘‘na hi apariyāpannānaṃ anusayuppattirahaṭṭhānatā’’ti, sopi na doso. Yattha yattha hi anusayā uppattirahā, tadeva ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘sabbatthā’’ti vuttanti. Tatheva dissatīti taṃ pamādalikhitaṃ viya dissatīti attho.
“由于已生起者应当存在”,意思是:从随眠潜藏之处来说,应当有由欲贪随眠所生起的状态;因此,对于欲贪随眠不可能生起的地方,就用“由于”这个词来表示从格。“如是”在这里是说:“如是”这个词表明,正如在“由于已生起者”这一说法中,从随眠可能生起之处说明了随眠有生起的可能,同样在“由能生起者”这一说法中,也是在说同一个道理。为了说明这一点,所以说“于一切法中……乃至……已陷入”。在这里,说“能生起”时,就可以知道其意思是“并非不能生起”;这样一来,由于它决定了“不生起”,也就显示了“已生的性质”。因此说“于一切法中……乃至……除去”。在“谁由于欲贪随眠而无随眠,他就由于慢随眠而无随眠”这一问中,因为出现了“由于何处,由于彼处”,所以在回答中,“一切处”这个词只能按从格来搭配。为了说明这一点,所以说“于一切处……乃至……并非不可能”。语法家们也主张在其他地方从处格来理解,因为“一切处”是一切词的依据,所以称为“一切处依据”;但在这里,应当按从格来理解。巴利
Yato uppannena bhavitabbanti yato anusayanaṭṭhānato kāmagārānusayena uppannena bhavitabbaṃ, tena kāmarāgānusayena uppattirahaṭṭhāne nissakkavacanaṃ kataṃ ‘‘yato’’ti. Tathāti ettha tathā-saddo yathā ‘‘yato uppannenā’’ti ettha uppattirahaṭṭhānato anusayassa uppattirahatā vuttā, tathā ‘‘uppajjanakenā’’ti etthāpi sā eva vuccatīti dīpetīti āha ‘‘sabbadhammesu…pe… āpannenā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘uppajjanako’’ti vutte anuppajjanako na hotīti ayamattho viññāyati, tathā ca sati tena anuppatti nicchitāti uppannasabhāvatā ca pakāsitā hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘sabbadhammesu…pe… apanetī’’ti. ‘‘Yo yato kāmarāgānusayena niranusayo, so tato mānānusayena niranusayo’’ti pucchāya ‘‘yato tato’’ti āgatattā vissajjane ‘‘sabbatthā’’ti padassa nissakkavaseneva sakkā yojetunti dassento ‘‘sabbatthāti…pe… na na sambhavatī’’ti āha. Bhummato aññatthāpi saddavidū icchanti, yato sabbesaṃ pādakaṃ ‘‘sabbatthapādaka’’nti vuccati, idha pana nissakkavasena veditabbaṃ.
3. 断除节的解说巴利
3. Pajahanavāravaṇṇanā
132-197 “未断除的存在”,是指未断除的、或者正在被断除的存在。因此,因为断除欲贪随眠的人,并没有完全断除慢随眠;而完全断除慢随眠的人,因为欲贪随眠早已被断除,所以不会再去断除它。正因如此,才说“如果有人断除慢随眠,他是否断除欲贪随眠?不是”,应当这样理解。如果这样的话,那第一个问题又怎么讲呢?所以他说“然而……中略……所说”。其中,“仅仅是断除的作用”,意思是仅仅有断除行为的可能,并不是说完全断除,这就是要表达的意思。“除了那些”,是指除了对见随眠、疑随眠等能够完全断除的第八种人(即不来道)等之外。“其余的”,是指对于每一种随眠,除了那些能完全断除它的人之外剩下的人。在这些人当中,有些随眠已经断除的人,也还是依据“未断除的存在”而说他们“不断除”。“而不是按照实际存在的那样”,意思是说,并不是按照以道的作用而实际存在的那种方式,说他们已断除、已远离,应当这样贯通理解。巴利
132-197.Appajahanasabbhāvāti appahānassa, appahīyamānassa vā sabbhāvā. Tasmāti yasmā yo kāmarāgānusayaṃ pajahati, na so mānānusayaṃ niravasesato pajahati, yo ca mānānusayaṃ niravasesato pajahati, na so kāmarāgānusayaṃ pajahati pageva pahīnattā, tasmā ‘‘yo vā pana mānānusayaṃ pajahati, so kāmarāgānusayaṃ pajahatīti? No’’ti vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ paṭhamapucchāyaṃ kathanti āha ‘‘yasmā pana…pe… vutta’’nti. Tattha pahānakaraṇamattamevāti pahānakiriyāsambhavamattameva, na niravasesappahānanti adhippāyo. Te ṭhapetvāti diṭṭhivicikicchānusayādīnaṃ niravasesapajahanake aṭṭhamakādike ṭhapetvā. Avasesāti tassa tassa anusayassa niravasesappajahanakehi avasiṭṭhā. Tesu yesaṃ ekacce anusayā pahīnā, tepi appajahanasabbhāveneva nappajahantīti vuttā. Na ca yathāvijjamānenāti maggakiccabhāvena vijjamānappakārena pahānena vajjitā rahitā eva vuttāti yojanā.
“某些人”是指具备预流道和一来道的预流者与一来者。接着“又某些人”是指具备不来道和阿拉汉道的不来者与阿拉汉。“两者”是指欲贪随眠和疑随眠这两个。“其余的”是指前面所说的那些补特伽罗。“他们”是指前面所说的那两种随眠。“不断除两者”是指不断除欲贪随眠和疑随眠。“没有理由”:对于那些疑随眠已被断除的人,理由不存在,即其理由已被断除;对于前面所说的两种随眠都已被断除的人,不存在他们不断除的理由,这就是意思。因此他说“因为不应说”:依所说之理不应说,因理由本身并不存在。然而,在那里并没有说理由,若以说理由之言辞,则会有如前所说的过失;只是为了以决定显示那些补特伽罗已被摄受,才说“不断除欲贪随眠”,即使如此,对于所问的疑惑之义,也应说理由。若如此,则“其余的补特伽罗因已断除该随眠故不断除”,理由确实应说,针对此责难而说“不应说”等。其中“不应说”:依所说之理不应说理由,因为理由本身并不存在。虽然说“不断除两者的理由不存在”,但为了显示应当如何说,而说“若欲贪随眠……乃至……应说故”。由此显示:依已断未断而言,不应说理由;然而依已断者而言,则应说。在“摄于疑惑之义”中,即由疑惑一词所摄。然而,摄于决定之词者,因正在被断除故,不能说“不断除”。巴利
Kesañcīti sotāpannasakadāgāmimaggasamaṅgisakadāgāmīnaṃ. Puna kesañcīti anāgāmiaggamaggasamaṅgiarahantānaṃ. Ubhayanti kāmarāgavicikicchānusayadvayaṃ. Sesānanti ‘‘sesā’’ti vuttānaṃ yathāvuttapuggalānaṃ. Tesanti vuttappakārānaṃ dvinnaṃ anusayānaṃ. Ubhayāppajahanassāti kāmarāgavicikicchānusayāppajahanassa. Kāraṇaṃ na hotīti yesaṃ vicikicchānusayo pahīno, tesaṃ tassa pahīnatā, yesaṃ yathāvuttaṃ ubhayappahīnaṃ, tesaṃ tadappajahanassa kāraṇaṃ na hotīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ pahīnattā ‘nappajahantī’ti na sakkā vattu’’nti. Atha pana na tattha kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, yena kāraṇavacanena yathāvuttadosāpatti siyā, kevalaṃ pana sanniṭṭhānena tesaṃ puggalānaṃ gahitatādassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘kāmarāgānusayañca nappajahantī’’ti, evampi pucchitassa saṃsayatthassa kāraṇaṃ vattabbaṃ. Tathā ca sati ‘‘sesapuggalā tassa anusayassa pahīnattā nappajahantī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vattabbamevāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘na vattabba’’ntiādi. Tattha na vattabbanti vuttanayena kāraṇaṃ na vattabbaṃ kāraṇabhāvasseva abhāvato. ‘‘Ubhayāppajahanassa kāraṇaṃ na hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, yathā pana vattabbaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yo kāmarāgānusayaṃ…pe… vattabbattā’’ti āha. Tena pahīnāppahīnavasena kāraṇaṃ na vattabbaṃ, pahīnānaṃyeva pana vasena vattabbanti dasseti. Saṃsayatthasaṅgahiteti saṃsayatthena padena saṅgahite. Sanniṭṭhānapadasaṅgahitaṃ pana pahīyamānattā ‘‘nappajahatī’’ti na sakkā vattunti.
已断分注释巴利
5. Pahīnavāravaṇṇanā
264-274 264-274. 开示是依果位而展开的,不是依道位,更不用说依凡夫了。为什么?因为在果的刹那,随眠被称为“已断”;而在道的刹那,则说它们“正在被断”。因此他说“阐明道俱行者的未执取性”。在逆序中,也依凡夫而含摄了开示,如“若见随眠未断,则疑随眠未断吗?是的”等等。所谓“随眠的绝对对立的一心刹那者”,是指那些成为随眠绝对对立的一心刹那者。所谓“道俱行者”,即道位者。在这里,通过“随眠的绝对对立性”这一表述,否定了它们有生起的可能。因为它们一旦从绝对对立者生起之后,就不再有可能生起。通过“道俱行性”这一表述,否定了它们已被赋予不生的可能。因为在道的刹那,它们并不是“已被赋予”不生的可能,而是“正在被赋予”。通过“一心刹那性”这一表述,否定了相续的作用。因此他说“没有任何……”等等。其中,“他们”指道俱行者。为了显示“不仅在已断的部分,在其他部分也是如此”,他说“随眠……被含摄”。巴利
264-274.Phalaṭṭhavaseneva desanā āraddhā, na maggaṭṭhavasena, kuto puthujjanavasena. Kasmā? Phalakkhaṇe hi anusayā pahīnāti vuccanti, maggakkhaṇe pana pahīyantīti. Tenevāha ‘‘maggasamaṅgīnaṃ aggahitataṃ dīpetī’’ti. Paṭilome hi puthujjanavasenapi desanā gahitā ‘‘yassa diṭṭhānusayo appahīno, tassa vicikicchānusayo appahīnoti? Āmantā’’tiādinā. Anusayaccantapaṭipakkhekacittakkhaṇikānanti anusayānaṃ accantaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtaekacittakkhaṇikānaṃ. Maggasamaṅgīnanti maggaṭṭhānaṃ. Ettha ca anusayānaṃ accantapaṭipakkhatāggahaṇena uppattirahataṃ paṭikkhipati. Na hi te accantapaṭipakkhasamuppattito parato uppattirahā honti. Maggasamaṅgitāggahaṇena anuppattirahatāpāditataṃ paṭikkhipati. Na hi maggakkhaṇe te anuppattirahataṃ āpāditā nāma honti, atha kho āpādīyantīti. Ekacittakkhaṇikatāggahaṇena santānabyāpāraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘na kocī’’tiādi. Tattha teti maggasamaṅgino. Na kevalaṃ pahīnavāreyeva, atha kho aññesupīti dassento ‘‘anusaya…pe… gahitā’’ti āha.
275-296 275-296. 随眠在哪里有生起的可能,就在那里让它获得不生起的可能,所以他说:“在自己的处所,就已令它获得不生起的法性。”确实是这样说的:“眼在世间是可爱、可意的,这渴爱生起时就在那里生起,安住时就在那里安住。”(《分别论》203)说了之后又说:“眼在世间是可爱、可意的,这渴爱断除时就在那里断除,灭尽时就在那里灭尽。”(《分别论》204)“因此”,意思是:因为那些“已断”“未断”的说法,正是显示随眠以欲界等为处所、就以那里为处所,所以这样说。“在非处所,这两者不可说”,是因为欲贪随眠和嗔恚随眠二者的生起之处,就是它们的断除之处;而这个断除之处对它们彼此来说是非处所,所以在那个非处所,不能说这两者已断或未断。因为在欲贪随眠的处所,嗔恚随眠是未断的,所以不能说它“在那里已断”;但又因为它不在那里安住,也不能说“在那里未断”。因此说“在非处所,这两者不可说”。“与它同处所”,是指与那个欲贪同处所。当说“在共通之处”时,是指在欲界的乐受和舍受中,它被称为已断,而不是在同一时间已断,因为欲贪随眠和慢随眠是第三、第四道所断的。巴利
275-296. Yattha anusayo uppattiraho, tatthevassa anuppattirahatāpādananti ‘‘attano attano okāse eva anuppattidhammataṃ āpādito’’ti āha. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkhuṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, ettha nivisamānā nivisatī’’ti (vibha. 203) vatvā puna vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkhuṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhatī’’ti (vibha. 204). Tasmāti yasmā tadokāsattameva kāmadhātuādiokāsattameva anusayānaṃ dīpenti pahīnāppahīnavacanāni, tasmā. Anokāse tadubhayāvattabbatā vuttāti yasmā kāmarāgapaṭighānusayānaṃ dvinnaṃ uppattiṭṭhānaṃ, so eva pahānokāsoti svāyaṃ tesaṃ aññamaññaṃ anokāso, tasmiṃ anokāse tadubhayassa pahānāppahānassa navattabbatā vuttā. Kāmarāgānusayokāse hi paṭighānusayassa appahīnattā so ‘‘tattha pahīno’’ti na vattabbo, aṭṭhitattā pana ‘‘tattha appahīno’’ti ca, tasmā anokāse tadubhayāvattabbatā vuttāti. Tena saddhiṃ samānokāseti tena kāmarāgena saddhiṃ samānokāse. ‘‘Sādhāraṇaṭṭhāne’’ti vutte kāmadhātuyaṃ sukhupekkhāsu pahīno nāma hoti, na samānakāle pahīno tatiyacatutthamaggavajjhattā kāmarāgamānānusayānaṃ.
第七,界分别的注释。巴利
7. Dhātuvāravaṇṇanā
332-340 332-340. 为了说明“未断除”就是“有生起的可能”,这里所说的“随逐而眠”是指什么,他说:“在那种……意义”。这里所说的“也相应”,是指他重新提到了前面已经说过的意思。正如前面所说:“在因缘具足时,显示有生起的可能。”(《双论根本注·随眠双论》)“六种遮止语句”,是指针对三界的死与结生这两种差别,以遮止的方式所说的语句,因此它们并不是对界差别的简择。因为他说,这里的“遮止”指的是“有情的遮止”,这是他的用意。但在其他地方,对于“不”这个字,就没有这个过失。“名为某界”:在以遮止为根本的语句中。因为如果这样——即像“不是从欲界死而往生欲界”等第一种连接方式存在时——由于说了往生于非欲界等,即使只是用“非欲界”等词,也已经摄取了界的差别,因此在意义上能够被了知。所以他说:“非欲界……被了知。”“应分解”就是应当加以分别。而这里的分辨被认为有两种,所以他说:“应当作两种,这就是意思。”“问与答”就是诸问与诸答。正如在未说的时候,由于不知道有“分”存在,就应当说“随眠分不存在”;同样,这个“有多少随眠分”也期待那个,所以那个也应当说。因为答是期待问的。巴利
332-340. Appahīnuppattirahabhāvā idha anugamanasayanānīti dassento ‘‘yasmiṃ…pe… attho’’ti āha. Idhāpi yuttāti pubbe vuttamevatthaṃ parāmasati. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘kāraṇalābhe uppattiarahataṃ dassetī’’ti (yama. mūlaṭī. anusayayamaka 1). Cha paṭisedhavacanānīti tissannaṃ dhātūnaṃ cutūpapātavisiṭṭhānaṃ paṭisedhanavasena vuttavacanāni, tato eva dhātuvisesaniddhāraṇāni na honti. Paṭisedhoti hi idha sattāpaṭisedho vuttoti adhippāyena vadati. Aññatthe pana na-kāre nāyaṃ doso. Imaṃ nāma dhātuṃ. Taṃmūlikāsūti paṭisedhamūlikāsu. Evañhīti ‘‘na kāmadhātuyā cutassa kāmadhātuṃ upapajjantassā’’tiādinā paṭhamayojanāya sati. Nakāmadhātuādīsu upapattikittaneneva nakāmadhātuādiggahaṇenapi dhātuvisesasseva gahitatāya atthato viññāyamānattā. Tenāha ‘‘na kāmadhātu…pe… viññāyatī’’ti. Bhañjitabbāti vibhajitabbā. Vibhāgo panettha duvidho icchitoti āha ‘‘dvidhā kātabbāti attho’’ti. Pucchā ca vissajjanāni ca pucchāvissajjanāni. Yathā avutte bhaṅgābhāvassa aviññātattā ‘‘anusayā bhaṅgā natthī’’ti vattabbaṃ, tathā tayidaṃ ‘‘kati anusayā bhaṅgā’’ti etadapekkhanti tadapi vattabbaṃ. Pucchāpekkhañhi vissajjananti.
1-62 有贪等这里,等这个字涵盖了从有贪的心生起,却不灭尽开始,一直到有心未解脱这一整段。善等则用等字涵盖了从有善的心生起,却不灭尽开始,一直到有皈依的心生起,却不灭尽这一整段。所以有贪等、善等指的是:有贪等未解脱的语句,和善等无染的语句,两者混杂在一起的各个分。纯净的是指纯粹只有前面说的有贪等和善等、不混杂其他内容的。各三个是指按人和法来分,各有三大分。如果这样的话,那怎么会有十六种人分呢?所以他说在每一处所说的当中,加以归拢之后。在十六种有贪等混杂心被说到的每一个地方,把人单独归拢、集合起来,就说为十六种人分。在法、人法分里也是同样的道理。并非无间断地说的意思是:不涉及法和人法,只在十六处无间断地单说人,归拢之后,并不称为十六种人分。巴利
1-62.Sarāgādīti ettha ādi-saddena ‘‘yassa sarāgaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati, na nirujjhatī’’ti ārabhitvā yāva ‘‘yassa avimuttaṃ citta’’nti vāro, tāva saṅgaṇhāti. Kusalādīti pana ādi-saddena ‘‘yassa kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati, na nirujjhatī’’ti ārabhitvā yāva ‘‘yassa saraṇaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati, na nirujjhatī’’ti vāro, tāva saṅgaṇhāti, tasmā sarāgādikusalādīhīti sarāgādīhi avimuttantehi, kusalādīhi araṇantehi padehi missakā vārā. Suddhikāti kevalā yathāvuttasarāgādīhi kusalādīhi ca amissakā. Tayo tayoti puggaladhammavasena tayo tayo mahāvārā. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ soḷasa puggalavārāti āha ‘‘tattha tattha pana vutte sampiṇḍetvā’’ti. Tattha tattha soḷasavidhe sarāgādimissakacitte vutte puggale eva ekajjhaṃ sampiṇḍetvā saṅgahetvā ‘‘soḷasa puggalavārā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dhammapuggaladhammavārā’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Na nirantaraṃ vutteti dhamme puggaladhamme ca anāmasitvā soḷasasupi ṭhānesu nirantaraṃ puggale eva vutte sampiṇḍetvā soḷasa puggalavārā na vuttāti attho.
“以接触的方式”是指以相混、以说法混杂的方式。否则,生起与灭去,以及现在和未来的时间,怎么能相混呢?其余诸品,也就是生起已生品等。“各自的名称”:比如“若某人的心生起,则他的心是已生起的”等等,由于触及了生起与已生的状态,从巴利圣典本身就能知道名为“生起已生品”;同样,其余诸品也应依照圣典来了知,所以说“各自的名称应依照圣典来了知”。巴利
Saṃsaggavasenāti saṃsajjanavasena desanāya vimissanavasena. Aññathā hi uppādanirodhā paccuppannānāgatakālā ca kathaṃ saṃsajjīyanti. Sesānampi vārānanti uppāduppannavārādīnaṃ. Taṃtaṃnāmatāti yathā ‘‘yassa cittaṃ uppajjati, tassa cittaṃ uppanna’’ntiādinā uppādauppannabhāvāmasanato uppādauppannavāroti nāmaṃ pāḷito eva viññāyati, evaṃ sesavārānampīti āha ‘‘taṃtaṃnāmatā pāḷianusārena veditabbā’’ti.
广说分的注释巴利
Niddesavāravaṇṇanā
63 “正是如此类者”,说的是拥有最后心的人。而“那心”,就是指前面所说的那个刹那的最后心。为了说明“如此种类”这个意思,所以说“即与坏灭刹那相应者”,因为正在坏灭的形态就被称为“如此种类”。巴利
63.Tathārūpassevāti pacchimacittasamaṅgino eva. Tañca cittanti tañca yathāvuttakkhaṇaṃ pacchimacittaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃpakāra’’nti imassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhaṅgakkhaṇasamaṅgimevā’’ti vuttaṃ nirujjhamānākārassa ‘‘evaṃpakāra’’nti vuttattā.
65-82 “二者”指的是这样一段话:心只是刹那现在,由于已经越过了生的刹那,所以名为“已生”;而那颗心在生的刹那,因为达到了生,所以是“已生”;因为还没有过去,所以名为“正生”。这两种说法合在一起就是“二者”。不能这样说,意思是:按上面那种方式不能说,但换一种方式可以说。其中,用“并非”等话是在阐明第一种立场。应当分别说,意思是应当这样分别:“在坏灭刹那,那颗心已生而不是正生;在生刹那,那颗心既已生又正生。”应当说“是”:在刹那现在心上,依所说之理两者皆可成立,但未说。现在为显示能以何种方式说,说“在心的坏灭刹那”等。说人,因为是人分。其,即人的。在心的坏灭刹那,由于具有心的坏灭刹那,所以没有心正生。然而那颗心正生,即那个人具有心,这里应当这样理解其义。如果依多心而说此双论,则针对此责难而说“心……乃至……住立”。应依决定而了知限定,否则以“并非那些心正生”等语作遮止便不成立,这是其义。如是类:如此状态,即依已生、正生等异名而应被说的那种状态,这是其义。巴利
65-82.Dvayametanti yaṃ ‘‘khaṇapaccuppannameva cittaṃ uppādakkhaṇāpagamena uppajjittha nāma, tadeva uppādakkhaṇe uppādaṃ pattattā uppajjittha, anatītattā uppajjati nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ, etaṃ ubhayampi. Evaṃ na sakkā vattunti iminā vuttappakārena na sakkā vattuṃ, pakārantarena pana sakkā vattunti adhippāyo. Tattha ‘‘na hī’’tiādinā paṭhamapakkhaṃ vibhāveti. Vibhajitabbaṃ siyāti ‘‘bhaṅgakkhaṇe taṃ cittaṃ uppajjittha, no ca uppajjati, uppādakkhaṇe taṃ cittaṃ uppajjittha ceva uppajjati cā’’ti vibhajitabbaṃ siyā, na ca vibhattaṃ . ‘‘Āmantā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā khaṇapaccuppanne citte vuttanayena ubhayassapi labbhamānattā, na ca vuttaṃ. Idāni yena pakārena sakkā vattuṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cittassa bhaṅgakkhaṇe’’tiādimāha. Puggalo vutto, puggalavāro hesoti adhippāyo. Tassāti puggalassa. Na ca kiñci cittaṃ uppajjati cittassa bhaṅgakkhaṇasamaṅgibhāvato. Taṃ pana cittaṃ uppajjati, yaṃ cittasamaṅgī so puggaloti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yadi anekacittavasenāyaṃ yamakadesanā pavattāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘cittanti hi…pe… tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Sanniṭṭhānavasena niyamo veditabbo, aññathā ‘‘no ca tesaṃ cittaṃ uppajjatī’’tiādinā paṭisedho na yujjeyyāti adhippāyo. Tādisanti tathārūpaṃ, yadavattho uppannauppajjamānatādipariyāyehi vattabbo hoti, tadavatthanti attho.
83-113 83-113. 因为这是“人品类”的段落,所以这里说的“若某人的心正在生起”等等,是属于已经过去的时段,也就是人品类。问的是人,也就是问“若某人的心正在生起……乃至……他的心”,问的是拥有心的人,所以应该用人来回答;否则就会变成问的是这个、答的却是另一个。没有任何众生不被包含在内,因为一切众生都不存在心未生起的状态,而他们全都是人。坏灭刹那已过去的心,就是已经成为坏灭刹那之后过去的心。同样地,第二问和第三问,就像第一问一样,因为所涉及的是无余的一切人,所以应该回答“是”;第二问和第三问也应该只回答“被指称”,这就是这里的意思。至于第四问,则应该这样区分之后,用人来回答;为了说明这一点,所以说了“最后心”等话;又为了说明不那样说的理由,说了“因为依心而安立人”等话。“在坏灭刹那,心已经越过了生起的刹那”——这是依现在心来说,人是生起刹那已过去的人;“过去的心已经越过了生起刹那,也越过了坏灭刹那”——这是依过去心来说,人是生起刹那已过去的人。巴利
83-113.Imassa puggalavārattāti ‘‘yassa cittaṃ uppajjamāna’’ntiādinayappavattassa imassa atikkantakālavārassa puggalavārattā. Puggalo pucchitoti ‘‘yassa cittaṃ uppajjamānaṃ…pe… tassa citta’’nti cittasamaṅgipuggalo pucchitoti puggalasseva vissajjanena bhavitabbaṃ, itarathā aññaṃ pucchitaṃ aññaṃ vissajjitaṃ siyā. Na koci puggalo na gahito sabbasattānaṃ anibbattacittatābhāvato. Te ca pana sabbe puggalā. Nirujjhamānakkhaṇātītacittāti nirujjhamānakkhaṇā hutvā atītacittā. Tathā dutiyatatiyāti yathā paṭhamapañho anavasesapuggalavisayattā paṭivacanena vissajjetabbo siyā, tathā tato eva dutiyatatiyapañhā ‘‘āmantā’’icceva vissajjetabbā siyunti attho. Catuttho pana pañho evaṃ vibhajitvā puggalavaseneva vissajjetabboti dassento ‘‘pacchimacittassā’’tiādiṃ vatvā tathā avacane kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘cittavasena puggalavavatthānato’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Bhaṅgakkhaṇe cittaṃ uppādakkhaṇaṃ vītikkanta’’nti iminā vattamānassa cittassa vasena puggalo uppādakkhaṇātītacitto, ‘‘atītaṃ cittaṃ uppādakkhaṇañca vītikkantanti bhaṅgakkhaṇañca vītikkanta’’nti iminā pana atītassa cittassa vasena puggalo uppādakkhaṇātītacitto vutto.
这里说的“其中”,是指在前面那两种人当中。“前者的”是指最初说到的、包含在决定句里的那个心,它还没有越过坏灭的刹那,因为原文说的是“没有越过坏灭刹那”。后者的心已经越过了坏灭刹那,应当这样连接起来理解,因为原文说的是“已经越过坏灭刹那”。像这样开头的种种人的区分,是针对第二问等所说的内容而说的。“依着显示那个心在各个刹那越过或未越过”,意思是:依着显示那个心生起的刹那和坏灭的刹那,按照各自相应的情况,显示它越过或未越过,这样就显示了人的区分,这是句子的连接方式。“在此”是指在“过去时”这一品当中。问的是以人为特征的心,因为原文说“谁的心,那就是谁的心”。虽然这个问是以人为主,因为这是“人品”;但也可以说问是以心为主,因为借着人来限定心,心才被区分出来。不管按哪种理解,对于第二问都应该回答“是”,因为它涉及的是没有遗漏的一切人。可是经文没有那样说,而是说“过去的心”,这是为什么呢?应当理解为:是为了显示灭的刹那……中间省略……这是句子的连接方式。这个道理在“不是正在灭”这个地方也同样适用。也就是说,正在灭的刹那、灭的刹那、已经越过的时刻,难道那个心就不是那个心吗?这就是这里的意思。巴利
Tatthāti tesu dvīsu puggalesu. Purimassāti paṭhamaṃ vuttassa sanniṭṭhānapadasaṅgahitassa cittaṃ na bhaṅgakkhaṇaṃ vītikkantaṃ. ‘‘No ca bhaṅgakkhaṇaṃ vītikkanta’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Pacchimassa vītikkantaṃ cittaṃ bhaṅgakkhaṇanti sambandho. ‘‘Bhaṅgakkhaṇañca vītikkanta’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Evamādiko puggalavibhāgoti dutiyapañhādīsu vuttaṃ sandhāyāha. Tassa cittassa taṃtaṃkhaṇavītikkamāvītikkamadassanavasenāti tassa tassa uppādakkhaṇassa bhaṅgakkhaṇassa ca yathārahaṃ vītikkamassa avītikkamassa ca dassanavasena dassito hoti puggalavibhāgoti yojanā. Idhāti imasmiṃ atikkantakālavāre. Puggalavisiṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ pucchitaṃ ‘‘yassa cittaṃ tassa citta’’nti vuttattā. Yadipi puggalappadhānā pucchā puggalavārattā. Athāpi cittappadhānā puggalaṃ visesanabhāvena gahetvā cittassa visesitattā. Ubhayathāpi dutiyapucchāya ‘‘āmantā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā anavasesapuggalavisayattā. Tathā pana avatvā ‘‘atītaṃ citta’’nti vuttaṃ, kasmā nirodhakkhaṇa…pe… dassanatthanti daṭṭhabbanti yojanā. Esa nayo ‘‘na nirujjhamāna’’nti etthāpīti nirujjhamānaṃ khaṇaṃ nirodhakkhaṇaṃ khaṇaṃ vītikkantakālaṃ kiṃ tassa cittaṃ na hotīti attho.
114-116 “有贪最后心”是指:在有贪的诸心中,属于最后的那一个心;也就是某一个人的所有与贪相应的心当中,那最末后的一个心。应知那个人是不来者。这个心不灭,因为它还没有具备灭。它将灭,也就是即将到达灭。然而,由于不再有结生,这个心之后不会再生起别的心。“其余”是指:除了前面所说的具有有贪最后心的人以及具有离贪心的人之外,其余的有学圣者和凡夫。巴利
114-116.Sarāgapacchimacittassāti sarāgacittesu pacchimassa cittassa, ekassa puggalassa rāgasampayuttacittesu yaṃ sabbapacchimaṃ cittaṃ, tassa. So pana puggalo anāgāmī veditabbo. Na nirujjhati nirodhāsamaṅgitāya. Nirujjhissati idāni nirodhaṃ pāpuṇissati. Appaṭisandhikattā pana tato aññaṃ nuppajjissati. Itaresanti yathāvuttasarāgapacchimacittasamaṅgiṃ vītarāgacittasamaṅgiñca ṭhapetvā avasesānaṃ itarasekkhānañceva puthujjanānañca.
第9章 法双品巴利
9. Dhammayamakaṃ
略说分的注释巴利
Uddesavāravaṇṇanā
1-16 在根本双论中,善等诸法是这样被教导的:善、不善、无记诸法,按照善与善根等的分类,在根本双论中以双论的方式被如实宣说。所谓“以其他方式”,是指离开善与善根等的分类,而以蕴等分类来说,这就是它的意思。巴利
1-16.Yathāmūlayamake kusalādidhammā desitāti kusalākusalābyākatā dhammā kusalakusalamūlādivibhāgato mūlayamake yamakavasena yathā desitā. Aññathāti kusalakusalamūlādivibhāgato aññathā, khandhādivasenāti attho.
第二 生起环节的注释巴利
2. Pavattivāravaṇṇanā
33-34 33-34. 不过,这里并没有把业等所生的色法算进去。“有些人”这句话是针对法喜长老说的。因为他引用了注释书里“依心等起色而说”的说法,然后说:“在这个问题里,业等所生的色法也可以得到。”这样说了之后,他又列出逆序的经文,说:“这里只以心等起色为意趣。对业等所生的色法,既没有规定,也没有遮止。”“如此”的意思是:就像在所说那种方式的经文里,只以心等起色为意趣,在这里也一样。“不”是和所说的内容连在一起的。“但是这里”的意思是:像所引经文那样的含义,不能那样说。为什么呢?因为说了“在心坏灭的刹那……由于遮止成立故”。这个遮止,就是下面已经显示出来的那个意思。巴利
33-34. Taṃ pana kammasamuṭṭhānādirūpaṃ aggahetvā. Kecīti dhammasirittheraṃ sandhāyāha. So hi ‘‘cittasamuṭṭhānarūpavasena vutta’’nti aṭṭhakathaṃ āharitvā ‘‘imasmiṃ pañhe kammasamuṭṭhānādirūpañca labbhatī’’ti avoca. Tathā ca vatvā paṭilomapāḷiṃ dassetvā ‘‘cittasamuṭṭhānarūpameva idhādhippetaṃ. Kammasamuṭṭhānādirūpe na vidhānaṃ, nāpi paṭisedho’’ti āha. Tathāti yathā vuttappakāre pāṭhe cittasamuṭṭhānarūpameva adhippetaṃ, tathā etthāpīti attho. Noti vuttanti vadantīti sambandho. Taṃ panetanti yathā uddhaṭassa pāṭhassa atthavacanaṃ, evaṃ na sakkā vattuṃ. Kasmāti āha ‘‘cittassa bhaṅgakkhaṇe…pe… paṭisedhasiddhito’’ti. Svāyaṃ paṭisedho heṭṭhā dassitoyevāti adhippāyo.
这里说“那些说者”时,“那些”是指金刚觉长老。因为他引用了《无碍解道》中“在预流道的刹那”等文句后说:“就像在那里,虽然也有业生色等,但将其搁置一边,因为是跟心相连的,所以只有心生色作为应当安立的内容而被引述出来;同样,在这里也只说了心生色。”然而,他们这种说法并不像他们所引述的那样成立,这是一个不恰当的比喻。为了说明它并不像他们所说的那样成立,所以说了“因为那些……”等话。“那些”是指业生色等,“那”是指圣道,“它们”是指无记法,也就是有生有灭的法。而在没有生灭的时候,就像涅槃一样。巴利
Ye ca vadantīti ettha ye cāti vajirabuddhittheraṃ sandhāyāha. So hi ‘‘sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe’’tiādinā paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiṃ āharitvā ‘‘yathā tattha satipi kammajādirūpe ṭhapetvā cittasamuṭṭhānarūpanti cittapaṭibaddhattā cittajarūpameva ṭhapetabbabhāvena uddhaṭaṃ, evamidhāpi cittajarūpameva kathita’’nti vadati. Tañca nesaṃ vacanaṃ tathā na hoti, yathā tehi udāhaṭaṃ, visamoyaṃ upaññāsoti attho. Yathā ca taṃ tathā na hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yesañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tesanti kammajādīnaṃ. Tassāti maggassa. Teti abyākatā, ye uppādanirodhavanto. Avijjamānesu ca uppādanirodhesu nibbānassa viya.
对于已通过确定方式把握的诸人:其中有些人具足不善心与无记心生起的刹那,有些人具足无记心生起的刹那,有些人具足善心与无记心生起的刹那。其中,前两类被归入第一部分,因为它们遮止善法的生起;然而,它们还应按“有”来分别解说,因此说“于五蕴有”等。“如是”即依照所说的方式。“于一切处”是指在一切问题中。巴利
Sanniṭṭhānenagahitesu puggalesu. Tesu hi keci akusalābyākatacittānaṃ uppādakkhaṇasamaṅgino, keci abyākatacittassa, keci kusalābyākatacittassa, tesu purimā dve paṭhamakoṭṭhāsena saṅgahitā tassa kusaluppattipaṭisedhaparattā, te pana bhavavasena vibhajitvā vattabbāti dassento ‘‘pañcavokāre’’tiādimāha. Evanti yathāvuttanayena. Sabbatthāti sabbapañhesu.
79 “从彼”是指从单一的转向路。在较早的速行路中,包含了趣向出起的那一部分,即使是在那里已生起的心。以善法未来有的终尽来说,就是以最上道的无间缘性,阐明了一切共同相。凭什么?就凭那共同相本身。这个理趣是这样的:正如善法不生起,因为它是善法未来有的终尽,所以在所说的限定之外也能成立,因此那所说的限定只是相而已——这个理趣已经显示出来了。这个理趣也适用于不善过去有的开头,即在“第二不善”所说的处;也适用于无记过去有的开头,即在“第二心”所说的处。现在用“这个理趣”这句话,把前面所说的指涉说得更清楚。“修习与舍断已被显示”,就是“具足最上道者修习善法,舍断不善法”。“此处”是指在这个生起的过程中。“彼彼”是指不善过去等和善未来等。“以彼彼”是指“在第二不善,具足最上道者”等语,以及最后的部分。巴利
79.Tatoti ekāvajjanavīthito. Purimatarajavanavīthi yāya vuṭṭhānagāminī saṅgahitā, tattha uppannassapi cittassa. Kusalānāgatabhāvapariyosānenāti kusaladhammānaṃ anāgatabhāvassa pariyosānabhūtena aggamaggānantarapaccayattena dīpitaṃ hoti samānalakkhaṇaṃ sabbaṃ. Kena? Tāya eva samānalakkhaṇatāya. Esa nayoti yathā kusalānuppādo kusalānāgatabhāvassa pariyosānabhūtato vuttaparicchedato orampi labbhatīti so yathāvuttaparicchedo lakkhaṇamattanti svāyaṃ nayo dassito. Esa nayo akusalātītabhāvassa ādimhi ‘‘dutiye akusale’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne, abyākatātītabhāvassa ādimhi ‘‘dutiye citte’’ti vuttaṭṭhānepīti yojanā. Idāni ‘‘esa nayo’’ti yathāvuttamatidesaṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādinā pākaṭataraṃ karoti. Bhāvanāpahānāni dassitāni honti ‘‘aggamaggasamaṅgī kusalañca dhammaṃ bhāveti, akusalañca pajahatī’’ti. Idhāti imasmiṃ pavattivāre. Taṃ tanti akusalātītatādi kusalānāgatatādi ca. Tena tenāti ‘‘dutiye akusale aggamaggasamaṅgī’’ti evamādinā antena ca.
100 从结生心说起,这里是在划定界限,而不是在详细分类,所以才说“第十六”。如果认为这里的意思是要详细分类,也就是“色法只持续十六个心刹那”,那么为了否定这种说法,就说“或者更往后”。这里的考察前面已经说明过了。可知为“不从那之前”,因为从那之前,在不善灭去的同时,无记灭去是不可能的。巴利
100.Paṭisandhicittatoti idaṃ mariyādaggahaṇaṃ, na abhividhiggahaṇaṃ, yato ‘‘soḷasama’’nti āha. Abhividhiggahaṇameva vā soḷasacittakkhaṇāyukameva rūpanti imasmiṃ pakkhe adhippete paṭikkhittovāyaṃ vādoti dassento ‘‘tato parampi vā’’ti āha. Ayañca vicāro heṭṭhā dassito eva. Na tato oranti viññāyati tato oraṃ akusalanirodhasamakālaṃ abyākatanirodhassa asambhavato.
10. 根双论巴利
10. Indriyayamakaṃ
略说门的注释巴利
Uddesavāravaṇṇanā
1 在《根双论》的分别中也是如此:就像在《根分别》里,命根列举在男根之后,而不是列举在意根之后,在这部《根双论》里也是这样。为了说明这是随顺经的教导,他说“这三者……中略……依照经中教导的次第”。为了说明在经中按次第列举的目的,说了“在转起门”等。其中,就像“命根”这个说法是对色命根和非色命根的通称,同样地,对所执受的和无所执受的,他说“是业生与非业生的守护者”。或者说,命根不仅是俱生法的守护者,不只是刹那住立的因,而且也是相续不断的因。否则,寿尽而死就不可能发生,因此没有区分地说“是业生法的守护者”,在死与结生时,它是正在转起的业生法的守护者。如此,因此。以那为根者,就是以命根为根。依死、结生、转起之力,就是依死与结生之力以及依转起之力。其中,凡是所执受的,只依死与结生之力来说;其他的,也要依其他之力来说。因为在以男根为结尾的眼根等诸根中,它们纯粹是所执受的,由于不具有中间的性质,意根并不是它们的根,所以除去它之后,其余以眼根等为根的,就是以眼根等为根。如同在《处双论》中,依结生之力说诸处的生起,依死亡之力说灭去,在这里也应当只依死与结生之力来说,因此,由于不具有中间的性质,命根没有在那些眼根等中间被列举,而是被列举在末尾、紧接在男根之后。至于在以眼根等为根的法中,意根被放在最后才取,其中的理由在义注中已经说过了。巴利
1.Indriyayamakevibhaṅge viyāti yathā indriyavibhaṅge purisindriyānantaraṃ jīvitindriyaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ, na manindriyānantaraṃ, evaṃ imasmiṃ indriyayamake. Tañca suttadesanānurodhenāti dassento ‘‘tīṇimāni…pe… sutte desitakkamenā’’ti āha. Soyaṃ yadatthaṃ tassa sutte desitakkamena uddeso, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pavattivārehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā ‘‘jīvitindriya’’nti idaṃ rūpajīvitindriyassa arūpajīvitindriyassa ca sāmaññato gahaṇaṃ, evaṃ upādinnassa anupādinnassa cāti āha ‘‘kammajānaṃ akammajānañca anupālaka’’nti. Atha vā sahajadhammānupālakampi jīvitindriyaṃ na kevalaṃ khaṇaṭṭhitiyā eva kāraṇaṃ, atha kho pabandhānupacchedassapi kāraṇameva. Aññathā āyukkhayamaraṇaṃ na sambhaveyya, tasmā ‘‘kammajānañca anupālaka’’nti avisesato vuttaṃ, cutipaṭisandhīsu ca pavattamānānaṃ kammajānaṃ anupālakaṃ. Itīti tasmā. Taṃmūlakānīti jīvitindriyamūlakāni. Cutipaṭisandhipavattivasenāti cutipaṭisandhivasena pavattivasena ca. Tattha yaṃ upādinnaṃ, taṃ cutipaṭisandhivaseneva, itaraṃ itaravasenapi vattabbaṃ. Yasmā cakkhundriyādīsu purisindriyāvasānesu ekantaupādinnesu ataṃsabhāvattā yaṃ manindriyaṃ mūlameva na hoti, tasmā taṃ ṭhapetvā avasesamūlakāni cakkhundriyādimūlakāni. Āyatanayamake viyāti yathā āyatanayamake paṭisandhivasenāyatanānaṃ uppādo, maraṇavasena ca nirodho vutto, evamidhāpi cutiupapattivaseneva vattabbāni, tasmā ataṃsabhāvattā jīvitindriyaṃ tesaṃ cakkhundriyādīnaṃ majjhe anuddisitvā ante purisindriyānantaraṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ. Yaṃ pana cakkhundriyādimūlakesu manindriyaṃ sabbapacchā eva gahitaṃ, tattha kāraṇaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttameva.
广说门的注释巴利
Niddesavāravaṇṇanā
94 有人说“没有任何自性”,意思是:没有任何一种自性法。如果是这样,那么用“没有”来否定,就是合理的,所以他说“不是色等”。为了说明在“乐、苦、不苦不乐”等说法中,乐、苦这些词虽然是通称,但在根教里它们只指特定的对象,所以他说“乐……中略……已经被取”。并且把苦作了区分。巴利
94.Kocisabhāvo natthīti koci sabhāvadhammo natthi. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘natthī’’ti paṭikkhepo eva yuttoti āha ‘‘na ca rūpādī’’tiādi. ‘‘Sukhā dukkhā adukkhamasukhā’’tiādīsu sukhadukkhasaddānaṃ sāmaññavacanabhāvepi indriyadesanāyaṃ te visiṭṭhavisayā evāti dassento ‘‘sukhassa…pe… gahitoyevā’’ti āha. Dukkhassa ca bhedaṃ katvā.
140 “是慧根”这句话,是对提问回答“是”之后说的。意思是:依了知的作用和增上的作用,它们是慧根;但依看的作用,它们就是眼。对于“眼是根吗”这个提问,回答“是”,这就是他的意图。虽然说过“唯是渴爱之流”,但在“凡有三十六流”等说法里,也出现了以见等为流的情况。巴利
140.Paññindriyāni hontīti āmantāti vuttanti pajānanaṭṭhena adhipateyyaṭṭhena ca paññindriyāni honti, dassanaṭṭhena pana cakkhūni cāti cakkhu, indriyanti pucchāya ‘‘āmantā’’ti vuttanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Taṇhāsotamevāhā’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘yassa chattiṃsati sotā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 339) pana diṭṭhiādīnampi sotabhāvo āgato.
2. 转起轮详解巴利
2. Pavattivāravaṇṇanā
186 186. “依他法”是指:应当依据“那些色法的寿、住”等(《法集论》634节)所说的他法来把握。意思是:如果取转起来作答,就无法成立取死与结生来作答的联结。而不可把握的事,甚至在乐、苦、忧根中也不可把握。以彼为根本的理趣,就是以乐根等为根本的理趣。依它们,就是依乐根等。所谓联结,是指像“在转起时,与乐根不相应的心生起的刹那”等那样,与正在生起的诸法相联结。以彼为根本、以及成为如是联结之根本的理趣,还有以命根等为根本的理趣,这些都是显而易见的,因为依照巴利文的脉络就能了知,极易理解。巴利
186.Aññadhammanissayenāti ‘‘yo tesaṃ rūpīnaṃ dhammānaṃ āyu ṭhitī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 634) aññadhammanissayena gahetabbaṃ. Pavattiñca gahetvā gatesu vissajjanesu, cutipaṭisandhiyo gahetvā gatesu yojanā na labbhatīti adhippāyo. Alabbhamānā ca sukhadukkhadomanassindriyeheva na labbhati. Taṃmūlakā ca nayāti sukhindriyādimūlakā ca nayā. Tehīti sukhindriyādīhi. Yojanāti ‘‘pavatte sukhindriyavippayuttacittassa uppādakkhaṇe’’tiādinā uppajjamānehi yojanā. Taṃmūlakā ca tathāyojanāmūlabhūtā ca nayā jīvitindriyādimūlakā ca nayā. Pākaṭāyevāti pāḷigatiyā eva viññāyamānayojanattā suviññeyyā eva.
这句话是说:应当理解为,只是以没有喜俱、但有眼根的结生作为例子来说明。怎么知道这只是举例,而不是在限定数量呢?他说“因为并没有规定只有四种”。所谓“具有相同特征”,是指与那种有眼根的结生具有相同特征,这是就取小异熟而言。对此,有人说:这是就有喜俱结生而言,把舍俱结生作为例子来说。小异熟结生也应当知道是善异熟无因结生,因为它也可能有眼根。或者说,“具有相同特征”是指与那种舍俱者具有相同特征,也就是前面所说的无因结生和第五禅结生。如果是这样,那为什么还要限定“四种”这个数目呢?他说“在欲界……乃至……作为例子”。因此,依舍俱大异熟这个例子,凡是因与它相同而被说成例子者,它们必定就是那种性质,这是这里的意趣。所以他说“如同有喜……乃至……成为”。巴利
Taṃ vacanaṃ. Somanassavirahitasacakkhukapaṭisandhinidassanavasenāti somanassavirahitasacakkhukapaṭisandhiyeva nidassananti yojetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘nidassanamattametaṃ, na pana gaṇanaparicchindana’’nti āha ‘‘na hi catunnaṃyevāti niyamo kato’’ti. Taṃsamānalakkhaṇāti tāya sacakkhukapaṭisandhitāya samānalakkhaṇāti parittavipākaggahaṇaṃ. Tattha sasomanassapaṭisandhiyo sandhāya upekkhāpaṭisandhiyo nidassanabhāvena vuttāti keci. Parittavipākapaṭisandhi ca kusalavipākāhetukapaṭisandhi veditabbā. Sāpi hi sacakkhukā siyā. Taṃsamānalakkhaṇāti vā tāya upekkhāsahagatāya samānalakkhaṇā yathāvuttaahetukapaṭisandhi ca pañcamajjhānapaṭisandhi ca. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘catunna’’nti kasmā gaṇanaparicchedoti āha ‘‘kāmāvacare…pe… nidassanaṃ kata’’nti. Tenāti upekkhāsahagatamahāvipākanidassanena, yehi samānatāya ime nidassanabhāvena vuttā, te ekaṃsena taṃsabhāvā evāti ayamettha adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘yathā sasomanassa…pe… to hotī’’ti.
难道不是在胎生者当中,这个道理并不能一概成立吗?针对这个疑问,他说:“对于胎生者……已显示。”因此他说“有眼者”等。在这里,如果对有因结生的欲界众生来说,必定显示为有眼等状态,这一点能通过胎生者成立,那么这种说法或许合理;针对这个责难,他说“即使在胎生者中……”等。同样,“已在处双论中显示”这句话,是参照自己在处双论注释中所说的“这样作之后,在根双论中……”等话而说的。因为在那一处,能产生喜根的业必定也产生眼根,即使在胎中,直到眼根生起为止,由于眼根正在生起,所以说“应当欢喜”。以决定的方式被包含,就是指以“或者,对于某人,喜根生起”这一决定方式所包含的。在“无鼻的女人结生”等句中,用“等”字包含了“无眼的女人结生”等情形。他们就是那些胎生者。巴利
Nanu ca gabbhaseyyakesu ayamattho ekaṃsato na labbhatīti āsaṅkaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘gabbhaseyyakānañca…pe… dassitā hotī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘sacakkhukāna’’ntiādi. Tattha yadi sahetukapaṭisandhikānaṃ kāmāvacarānaṃ niyamato sacakkhukādibhāvadassanaṃ gabbhaseyyakavasena labbheyya, yuttametaṃ siyāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘gabbhaseyyakepi hī’’tiādi. Tathā āyatanayamake dassitanti idaṃ āyatanayamakavaṇṇanāyaṃ attanā vuttaṃ ‘‘evañca katvā indriyayamake’’tiādivacanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha hi somanassindriyuppādakakammassa ekantena cakkhundriyuppādanato gabbhepi yāva cakkhundriyuppatti, tāva uppajjamānatāya ‘‘abhinanditabbattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sanniṭṭhānena saṅgahitānanti ‘‘yassa vā pana somanassindriyaṃ uppajjatī’’ti etena sanniṭṭhānena saṅgahitānaṃ. Itthīnaṃ aghānakānaṃ upapajjantīnanti ādīsūti ādi-saddena ‘‘itthīnaṃ acakkhukānaṃ upapajjantīna’’ntiādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Te evāti gabbhaseyyakā eva.
有该外观但无眼的结生,其状态具有相同的特征。这里说的“此中”,是指无因结生心。定的残余,就是微弱的定,仅仅是心住立而已。因此,既然没有像心住立那样微弱的精进可以称为“精进的残余”,所以意思是:连残余程度的精进也不存在。“在其他中”,是指从无因结生心之外的其他心。“在某些中”,是指在某些情况下。这两者都指的是意门转向的生笑心。这里,是指在无因结生心中。定与精进都没有达到根的程度,所以这里否定的是定的作用,并不是否定定的微量,而是因为连精进残余也不存在,应当这样理解。因此他说:“因为能区别者,是在所区别之处生起的。”意思是:如果有某种精进存在,根就可能生起,而那里恰恰没有那种精进。巴利
Taṃsamānalakkhaṇanti sopekkhaacakkhukapaṭisandhibhāvena samānalakkhaṇaṃ. Tatthāti ahetukapaṭisandhicitte. Samādhileso dubbalasamādhi yo cittaṭṭhitimatto. Tasmāti yasmā cittaṭṭhiti viya dubbalaṃ vīriyaṃ natthi, yo ‘‘vīriyaleso’’ti vattabbo, tasmā, lesamattassapi vīriyassa abhāvāti attho. Aññesūti ahetukapaṭisandhicittato aññesu. Kesucīti ekaccesu. Ubhayenapi manodvārāvajjanahasituppādacittaṃ vadati. Idhāti ahetukapaṭisandhicitte. Samādhivīriyāni indriyappattāni ca na hontīti samādhikiccaṃ paṭikkhipati, na samādhimattaṃ, na vīriyalesassa sabbhāvatoti yojetabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘visesanañhi visesitabbe pavattatī’’ti. Yasmiṃ vīriye sati indriyuppatti siyā, tadeva tattha natthīti attho.
依恶趣化生者来说,这是考虑到善趣的化生者不会根不具而说的;但注释里说“依二因结生者”,因为已经说了“智不相应者也是可以得到的”。他们,就是指女根和男根相续的人。而女根和男根的生灭,确实是频繁发生的。初劫人等,这里由“等”字所包括的,应当知道是依转变性别者来说生灭的把握。而依初劫人来说,则只可得生起。“即使在第二问中,也应当知道依死与结生,以决定的方式把握”,这是由已执受根所限定而说的。巴利
Apāyeopapātikavasenāti idaṃ sugatiyaṃ opapātiko vikalindriyo na hotīti katvā vuttaṃ, ‘‘labbhanteva ñāṇavippayuttāna’’nti pana vuttattā ‘‘duhetukapaṭisandhikānaṃ vasenā’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tesanti itthipurisindriyasantānānaṃ. Itthipurisindriyānaṃ pana uppādanirodhā abhiṇhasova hontīti. Paṭhamakappikādīnanti ettha ādi-saddena gahitānaṃ parivattamānaliṅgānaṃ vasena uppādanirodhaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Paṭhamakappikānaṃ pana vasena uppādo eva labbhati. ‘‘Cutiupapattivaseneva dutiyapucchāsupi sanniṭṭhānehi gahaṇaṃ veditabba’’nti idaṃ upādinnaindriyehi niyamitattā vuttaṃ.
190 从“见到相续的生灭”这一角度来说,是因为依着相续,生起与灭去能够被见到。通过这一点,从道理上证明了色命根与眼根等具有相同的趣向。而从教理方面,则将在后面以“没有喜俱”等说法来证明。“断”应当理解为一个名称,因为仅仅通过见到它自身的相状,就能断除疑惑。巴利
190.Santānuppattinirodhadassanatoti santānavasena uppādanirodhānaṃ dissamānattā. Etena rūpajīvitindriyassa cakkhundriyādisamānagatikataṃ yuttito sādheti. Āgamato pana ‘‘vinā somanassenā’’tiādinā parato sādhessati. Chedoti nāmaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ sarūpadassaneneva saṃsayachedanato.
“彼”指的是色命根。而“他们”就是无想有情。难道命根的生起不正是应该依死与结生来说,而不是依“不生起”来说吗?对此,他说:“不生起……不转起。”为了显示这个道理不只在前分中成立,在后分中也同样被采用,所以说“在后分也……”等。巴利
Tassāti rūpajīvitindriyassa. Te ca asaññasattā. Nanu ca uppādova jīvitindriyassa cutiupapattivasena vattabbo, na anuppādoti āha ‘‘anuppādo…pe… na pavatte’’ti. Ayañca nayo na kevalaṃ purimakoṭṭhāse eva, atha kho itarakoṭṭhāsepi gahito evāti dassento ‘‘pacchimakoṭṭhāsepī’’tiādimāha.
为什么说“在结生心生起的那一刹那”?为了说明提出这个责难背后的意图,才说了“难道净居天……”等等。所谓“不应说”,意思是:不应该说“对结生者而言”,而应该说“在结生心生起的那一刹那”。现在为了说明为什么不应该说“对结生者而言”,就说了“譬如……”等等。喜根与非喜根,就是喜根和非喜根;或者这就是原文的读法。“那时”指的是第一色命根还存在的时刻。“因此”,是因为色命根和无色命根确实有时间上的差别,而这里把两者按“命根”这一共同性质合在一起把握,所以说“因此”。“两者”就是喜根和命根这两者。以生起的那一刹那来举例说明,这是表明“在结生心生起的那一刹那”只是一个举例而已。现在为了用譬喻把这个意思说得更清楚,就说了“譬如……”等等。其中,譬如可以从众多这类心的灭去时刻中,取其中一部分——最初结生心的灭去时刻来举例说明;同样,这里也可以从两个刹那中取可得的那一部分——生起的时刻来举例说明。应当这样理解举例说明的用意。巴利
‘‘Upapatticittassa uppādakkhaṇe’’ti kasmā vuttanti yenādhippāyena codanā katā, tamadhippāyaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘nanu suddhāvāsa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Na vattabbanti ‘‘upapajjantāna’’nti na vattabbaṃ, ‘‘upapatticittassa uppādakkhaṇe’’icceva vattabbanti attho. Idāni yathā ‘‘upapajjantāna’’nti na vattabbaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Somanassamanindriyānanti somanassindriyamanindriyānaṃ, ayameva vā pāṭho. Tadāti paṭhamassa rūpajīvitindriyassa dharamānakāle. Tasmāti yasmā rūpārūpajīvitindriyānaṃ attheva kālabhedo, ubhayañcettha jīvitindriyabhāvasāmaññena ekajjhaṃ katvā gayhati, tasmā. Ubhayanti somanassindriyajīvitindriyanti idaṃ ubhayaṃ. Uppādakkhaṇena nidassitanti etena ‘‘upapatticittassa uppādakkhaṇe’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattanti dasseti. Idāni tamevatthaṃ udāharaṇena pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā tādisānaṃ anekesaṃ cittānaṃ bhaṅgakkhaṇe labbhamānaṃ tadekadesena sabbapaṭhamassa upapatticittassa bhaṅgakkhaṇena nidassitaṃ, evamidhāpi khaṇadvaye labbhamānaṃ tadekadesena uppādakkhaṇena nidassitanti evaṃ nidassanattho veditabbo.
“他们”是指命根等。“在其他情况下”是指在已经转起的状态中。“这里”是指在未来时的差别中。并非不可能,因为就像结生的那一刹那,之后的转起刹那也同样具有未来时的性质。因此,从结生之外的其他情况来看,也正如所意想的那样有生起的可能。为了说明这个道理在另一个转门中也同样可见,所以说了“如此而作”等话。用“非”等来论证那同一个意思。其中,“最后……连结者”中的“api”一词,是为了显示“更何况非最后有者与喜俱结生者呢”这个意思。对于非最后有者,在死后根本不必说“喜根将灭”,所以说了“在死之前”。在这里,关于最初的问句等中的决定义,简要来说是这样的——在这里,“谁的眼根将生起”等双论中,那些最初的问句,其意义包含在决定句中。所问之义的所依,即“他的喜根将生起”等所问之义的所依,是与我相似的意义,也就是与结生生起之根俱行,或与结生刹那生起位之根俱行,或与两者生起之根俱行,即与结生及转起中生起位之根俱行。反转之后所问之义的所依,即“或者”等反转后所问的疑惑之义的所依。如此,以类似这样的意趣,在“或者他的喜根将生起”等第二问句中,唯将决定义——即包含在决定句中的义——确定为决定义。就在那里,在那些同样的先前所说的最初问句中,对于“他的喜根将生起”等所问之义,仅以未来状态而从自相上把握的生起,即称为生起者;对于“他的喜根将灭”等所问之义,仅以未来状态而从自相上把握的灭,或称为灭者——这些都不确定为疑惑之义。如此,以所说的方式,决定义被确定,而不是疑惑义被确定,因此说了“或者……乃至……是”。这是法则:在生起门中所说的考察,在灭门中也同样是这个法则。因此说了“或者他的喜根将灭,他的眼根将灭吗?是。”巴利
Tesanti jīvitindriyādīnaṃ. Aññatthāti pavatte. Idhāti anāgatakālabhede. Na na sambhavati upapattikkhaṇassa viya tato paraṃ pavattikkhaṇassapi anāgatakālabhāvato. Tasmāti upapattito aññatthāpi yathādhippetauppādasambhavato. Ayañca attho vārantarepi dissatīti dassento āha ‘‘evañca katvā’’tiādi. Na hītiādinā tamevatthaṃ samattheti. Tattha api pacchima…pe… sandhikassāti api-saddena ‘‘ko pana vādo apacchimabhavikassa somanassasahagatapaṭisandhikassā’’ti dasseti. Apacchimabhavikassa cutito pacchā ‘‘somanassindriyaṃ nirujjhissatī’’ti vattabbameva natthīti āha ‘‘cutito pubbevā’’ti. Ettha hi paṭhamapucchāsu sanniṭṭhānatthotiādīsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – ettha ‘‘yassa cakkhundriyaṃ uppajjissatī’’ti evamādīsu yamakesu yā paṭhamapucchā, tāsu sanniṭṭhānapadasaṅgahito attho. Pucchitabbatthanissayoti ‘‘tassa somanassindriyaṃ uppajjissatī’’tiādikassa pucchitabbassa atthassa nissayabhūto mādisova mayā sadiso eva attho upapattiuppādindriyavā upapattikkhaṇe uppādāvatthaindriyasahito, ubhayuppādindriyavā paṭisandhipavattīsu uppādāvatthaindriyasahito vā. Paṭinivattitvāpi pucchitabbatthassa nissayoti ‘‘yassa vā panā’’tiādinā paṭinivattitvā pucchitabbassapi saṃsayatthassa nissayoti evaṃ iminā viya ajjhāsayena ‘‘yassa vā pana somanassindriyaṃ uppajjissatī’’tiādīsu dutiyapucchāsu sanniṭṭhānatthameva sanniṭṭhānapadasaṅgahitameva atthaṃ niyameti. Tattheva tāsu eva pubbe vuttapaṭhamapucchāsu eva. Pucchitabbaṃ ‘‘tassa somanassindriyaṃ uppajjissatī’’tiādīsu anāgatabhāvamattena sarūpato gahitaṃ uppādaṃ uppādasaṅkhātaṃ, ‘‘tassa somanassindriyaṃ nirujjhissatī’’tiādīsu anāgatabhāvamattena sarūpato gahitaṃ nirodhaṃ vā nirodhasaṅkhātaṃ vā saṃsayatthaṃ na niyametīti. Evanti vuttappakārena sanniṭṭhānatthassa niyamo hoti, na saṃsayatthassa, tasmā ‘‘yassa vā pana…pe… āmantā’’ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayoti yvāyaṃ uppādavāre vicāro vutto, nirodhavārepi eseva nayo. Tathā hi ‘‘yassa vā pana somanassindriyaṃ nirujjhissati, tassa cakkhundriyaṃ nirujjhissatīti? Āmantā’’ti vuttaṃ.
因为没有被直接说出来的缘故,是指未来的生与灭没有以它们自身的形态被说出来。因为在那个地方,它们并不是以自身形态被说出的,而是通过“将不会生起”这种遮遣的方式被说出的。“在那个地方”是指在顺向的论述中。在逆向的论述中就不应该这样搭配。用“正如”等语句来说明那不应该搭配的道理。超越了生与灭之后,生与灭可以搭配;同样,还没有达到生与灭的时候,生与灭也可以搭配——这就是搭配的方式。而这两种情况在顺向论述中成立,在逆向论述中则不成立。因此说“在逆向中不成立……乃至……不成立”。在那里说明原因:“非有之无……乃至……不成立之不合理故”。“非有之无”是指非有的无,即非有的生与灭的无,这是所指。因此说“非有的生灭之无在逆向中被问及”,所以说了“是”,而没有说回答,这是关联。对于这个没有区别的非有之无,即如上所说的,如色的无、受的无等,任何一种无也都是有区别的,并非如此——对于没有区别的非有之无。巴利
Evaṃ avuttattāti uppādanirodhānaṃ anāgatānaṃ sarūpena avuttattā. Na hi tattha te sarūpena vuttā, atha kho ‘‘nuppajjissatī’’ti paṭikkhepamukhena vuttā. Tatthāti anulome. Na evaṃ yojetabbā paṭilome. Tameva ayojetabbataṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādinā vivarati. Uppādanirodhe atikkamitvā uppādanirodhā sambhavanti yojetuṃ, tathā uppādanirodhe appatvā uppādanirodhā sambhavanti yojetunti yojanā. Idañca dvayaṃ yathānulome sambhavati, na evaṃ paṭilome. Tenāha ‘‘na evaṃ…pe… sambhavantī’’ti. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘abhūtābhāvassa…pe… sambhavānupapattito’’ti. Abhūtābhāvassāti abhūtassa abhāvassa, abhūtassa uppādassa nirodhassa ca abhāvassāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘abhūtuppādanirodhābhāvo ca paṭilome pucchito’’ti, tasmā ‘‘āmantā’’ti ca vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ vissajjananti sambandho. Assa visesarahitassa abhūtābhāvassāti imassa yathāvuttassa yathā rūpābhāvo vedanābhāvoti koci abhāvopi visesasahito, na evamayanti visesarahitassa abhūtābhāvassa.
因为离开了特定时间的关联,所以说是“无有时节关联”。所谓“那些”,是指那些已存在、虽不是现在、但在有因缘时能够生起的法,这里的意思是指那些未来法。以生与灭都不存在来提问,就是“将不生、将不灭”这样,以生和灭都不存在来提问的意义。所依,就是作为依止,通过决定而被确定,被包含在决定之句中。那所说的意义是这些法的所依,所以叫“以彼为依”。仅仅对于那样的未来法,仅仅对于结生与死这种生灭——也就是称为结生与死的生灭——以遮遣无生无灭的方式来说。对于命根等,以及意根等,也是如此。无生无灭是以疑惑句来问的:“谁的喜根将不生,他的喜根将不灭吗?”回答说“是”,因为没有需要分别解说的内容。因此说“没有说……解答”。巴利
Kālantarayogābhāvatoti kālavisesayogābhāvato. Yādisānanti yāni bhūtāni na vattamānāni sati paccaye uppajjanārahāni, tesaṃ anāgatānanti attho. Uppādanirodhābhāvena pucchitabbassāti ‘‘nuppajjissati na nirujjhissatī’’ti evaṃ uppādassa nirodhassa ca abhāvena pucchitabbassa atthassa. Sannissayo nissayabhūto sanniṭṭhānena sannicchito sanniṭṭhānapadasaṅgahito. So yathāvutto attho nissayo etesanti tannissayā. Tādisānaṃyeva anāgatānaṃyeva upapatticutiuppādanirodhānaṃ upapatticutisaṅkhātauppādanirodhānaṃ anuppādānirodhānaṃ paṭikkhepavasena. Jīvitādīnampi jīvitamanindriyādīnampi. Anuppādānirodhā saṃsayapadena pucchitā honti ‘‘yassa somanassindriyaṃ nuppajjissati, tassa somanassindriyaṃ na nirujjhissatī’’ti. ‘‘Āmantā’’ti vuttaṃ vibhajitvā vattabbassa abhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘na vuttaṃ…pe… vissajjana’’nti.
那些将在色界以舍俱结生的人,他们被包含在内——这是句义连接。所谓“以彼同相性故”,就是由于那种舍俱结生的状态而具有相同的特征。那是因疏忽而写下的,因为在《法双论》中并没有那样的说法。在那里应当说的内容,已经在《心双论》中说过:“并非在刹那现在中有‘已生起’这种过去施设”等等。巴利
Ye sopekkhapaṭisandhikā bhavissanti rūpaloke, te saṅgahitāti yojanā. Taṃsamānalakkhaṇatāyāti tena sopekkhapaṭisandhikabhāvena samānalakkhaṇatāya. Taṃ pamādalikhitaṃ dhammayamake tādisasseva vacanassa abhāvato. Tatthapi yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ cittayamake vuttaṃ ‘‘na hi khaṇapaccuppanne uppajjitthāti atītavohāro atthī’’tiādinā.
3. 遍知门解说巴利
3. Pariññāvāravaṇṇanā
435-482 “属于世间无记”说的是:除去果法、涅槃之外的无记法。“取它们”说的是:取这些世间无记法。对于与它们同趣同道的意根等,就像“他遍知受蕴吗?——是的”这样(《蕴双论》206),像受蕴等一样说了应遍知性。因为凡是应当遍知的,就说为“他遍知”等。这样,即使这个意思已经正确成立,质问者还是抓住“混合”这个词里能挑出的毛病,用“如果应遍知的是混合的”等话来质问。他的意思是:就像这里说了混合的应遍知性,别处也应该说它们的应遍知性;同样,混合的应修习性也应该说。所以他说“为什么在《法双论》中”等。在善与不善中有修习和断除的侧重,因此说“他舍断那不善,修习善”等。“并非无记性”这句,是用来说明:就像从触门和从识门生起善等的方式一样,无记法等也不像受蕴等那样有应遍知性。巴利
435-482.Lokiyaabyākatehīti phaladhammanibbānavinimuttehi abyākatehi. Tāni upādāyāti tāni lokiyaabyākatāni upādāya. Taṃsamānagatikānaṃ manindriyādīnaṃ ‘‘so vedanākkhandhaṃ parijānātīti? Āmantā’’tiādinā (yama. 1.khandhayamaka.206) vedanākkhandhādīnaṃ viya pariññeyyatā vuttā. Yañhi parijānitabbaṃ, tadeva parijānātītiādinā vuttaṃ. Evamaviparīte atthe siddhepi codako ‘‘missakattā’’ti ettha labbhamānaṃ lesaṃ gahetvā codeti ‘‘yadi pariññeyyamissakattā’’tiādinā. Tassattho – yathā idha pariññeyyamissakānaṃ pariññeyyatā vuttā, evamaññatthāpi sā tesaṃ vattabbā, tathā bhāvetabbamissakānaṃ bhāvetabbatāti. Tenāha ‘‘kasmā dhammayamake’’tiādi. Kusalākusalesu bhāvanāpahānābhiniveso hoti, yena vuttaṃ ‘‘so taṃ akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādi. Na abyākatabhāvanti ekena yathā phassadvārato viya viññāṇadvārato kusalādīnaṃ uppattipariyāyo, evaṃ vedanākkhandhādīnaṃ viya na abyākatādīnaṃ pariññeyyatāpariyāyoti dasseti.
不被当作善或不善,意思就是不被当作集谛的性质。所谓“善与不善”,也同样是善与不善的状态。即使没有应修习和应断除这两种性质,也仍然有不属于道谛和集谛方面的法。就像在“色是无常”这句话里,“唯”字只是排除了它的对立面“色是常”,并没有排除它的苦性和无我性等;同样,在“唯应断除”这句话里,“唯”字排除的是作为对立面的“不应断除”,并不是说此外还有什么别的差别。为了说明这一点,论师说“以此,唯应断除”等等。应修习的性质,因为被理解为最上等的趣向,所以被归到其他根上。为什么说“本应写在后面的,却颠倒顺序写了”呢?因为“二个人”等是从随顺的顺序中摘出来的,而“不了知眼根”等则是逆序的。“不舍忧根”这个说法,是对经文“不舍忧根”这句话的含义解释。然而,如果认为“这是越过以眼根为根本的,而说以忧根为根本的”,那就不恰当了,因为这是针对逆序而来的内容说的,注释师不会跳过前面出现的词句,去解释同样在后面出现的词句的含义。因为在注释中,义理的解释是依照词句顺序开始并完成的,所以应当知道这里是按顺序书写的,而不是逆序,因为“二个人”等是从随顺顺序中摘出来的。巴利
Kusalākusalabhāvena aggahitāti samudayasabhāvena aggahitāti attho. Kusalākusalāpīti kusalākusalabhāvāpi samānā. Bhāvetabbapahātabbabhāvehivināpi hoti, yo na maggasamudayasaccapakkhiyo. Yathā ‘‘aniccaṃ rūpa’’nti ettha ‘‘aniccameva rūpaṃ, na nicca’’nti paṭiyogivinivattanameva eva-kārena karīyati, na tassa dukkhānattatādayo nivāritā honti, evaṃ ‘‘pahātabbamevā’’ti ettha eva-saddena paṭiyogibhūtaṃ appahātabbameva nivattīyati, na tato aññavisesāti dassento āha ‘‘etena pahātabbamevā’’tiādi. Bhāvetabbabhāvo eva tassa aññindriyassa gahito ukkaṃsagativijānanato. ‘‘Parato likhitabbaṃ uppaṭipāṭiyā likhita’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ. Dve puggalāti hi ādi anulome āgataṃ uddhaṭaṃ, cakkhundriyaṃ na parijānātītiādi pana paṭilome. Domanassindriyaṃ na pajahanti nāmāti idaṃ ‘‘no ca domanassindriyaṃ pajahantī’’ti pāḷipadassa atthavacanaṃ. Yaṃ pana ‘‘cakkhundriyamūlakaṃ atikkamitvā domanassindriyamūlake idaṃ vutta’’nti vuttaṃ, paṭilome āgataṃ sandhāya vuttattā taṃ na yuttaṃ, na taṃ aṭṭhakathācariyā paṭhamaṃ āgataṃ padaṃ laṅghitvā tādisasseva pacchā āgatapadassa atthavaṇṇanaṃ karonti. Padānukkamato eva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ atthavaṇṇanā āraddhā, pariyosāpitā ca, tasmā anupaṭipāṭiyāva likhitaṃ, na uppaṭipāṭiyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘dve puggalā’’tiādikassa anulome āgatassa uddhaṭattā.
这里,“于此”是指在遍知这一节。“六种人”是指连同凡夫在内,一直到住于不还道果位的人,共六种人。之所以没有区分开来而笼统地取,是因为在那里并没有取堪任者和不堪任者各自不同的作用。然而,在总体上包含凡夫的地方,如果取了堪任者的作用,或者在不堪任者的地方取了不堪任者的作用,那么在那些地方,就应该把他们区分开来宣说。为了显示这一点,所以说了“那些将获得道的凡夫,以及那些不会获得道的凡夫”等等。“阿拉汉”是指圣者;或者这本身就是另一种读法。“具足初道果者”是指具足前面道果的人。“其余者”是指阿拉汉。“这样了知人的差别”是指:在这里取了凡夫和不堪任者,在这里取了堪任者,在这里取了圣者——从具足初道果者一直到具足最高道果者——这样了知如上所说的人的分别。“在那些地方”是指在各个文句处,按照上述这些人的有分别和无分别两种取法而来。“以确定”是指以确定的词句,或者纯粹以决断。“抉出”是指引出。“应当与解答相结合”是指应当结合解答的方式,按照所宣说的巴利文,从关联上加以说明。巴利
Etthāti etasmiṃ pariññāvāre. Cha puggalāti puthujjanena saddhiṃ yāva anāgāmimaggaṭṭhā cha puggalā. Abhinditvā gahito tattha bhabbābhabbānaṃ kiccavisesassa aggahitattā. Yattha pana sati puthujjanaggahaṇasāmaññe bhabbānaṃ kiccaṃ gahitaṃ, yattha ca abhabbānaṃ, tattha te eva bhinditvā vuttā hontīti dassento ‘‘ye ca puthujjanā maggaṃ paṭilabhissanti, ye ca puthujjanā maggaṃ na paṭilabhissantī’’ti ca ādimāha. Arahāti ariyo, ayameva vā pāṭho. Paṭhamamaggaphalasamaṅgīti purimamaggaphalasamaṅgī. Itaroti arahā. Evaṃ puggalabhedaṃ ñatvāti idha puthujjano so ca abhabboti gahito, idha bhabbo idha ariyā, ye ca paṭhamamaggaphalasamaṅgino yāva aggamaggaphalasamaṅginoti evaṃ yathāvuttaṃ puggalavibhāgaṃ ñatvā. Tattha tatthāti tesaṃ dve puthujjanā aṭṭha ariyāti imesaṃ yathāvuttapuggalānaṃ bhedato abhedato ca gahaṇavasena āgate tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pāṭhapadese. Sanniṭṭhānenāti sanniṭṭhānapadavasena, nicchayavaseneva vā. Niddhāretvāti nīharitvā. Vissajjanaṃ yojetabbanti vissajjanavasena pavattapāḷiyā yathāvuttaatthadassanena sambandhato vibhāvetabboti.